N. KOSHKIN and M. SHIRKEVICH
HANDBOOK OF ELEMENTARY PHYSICS
FOREIGN LANGUAGES PURUSlilNG HOUSE Moscow
~
lt
TRANSLATED FROM THE RUSSIAN BY F. LEIB
CONTENTS Preface . . . . . . . . . . . Explanatory Notes . . . . . C hap t e r 1. Mechanics. . .
12 13 15
A. Kinematics Fundamental Concepts and Laws . . . . . 1. Rectilinear Motion . . . . . . 2. Rotational Motion . . . . . . 3. Motion of Bodies in the Earth's Gravitational Field . . . . . . . . . . . . Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 1. Velocity of Motion of Different Bodies Table 2. Acceleration of Different Bodies (Approximate Values) . . . . . . . . . . Table 3. Escape Velocities in the Solar System
15 16 17
19
21
21
21 22
B. Dynamics
I . . . .(
Fundamental Concepts and Laws . 1. Laws of Dynamics . . . . . 2. Work, Power and Energy 3. Dynamics of Rotation. . . 4. Friction '.' . . . . . . . 5. Law of Universal Gravitation Tables. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 4. Density of Some Solids (at 20C) Table 5. Density of Liquids (at 20° C) . . . • Table6. Density of Some Metals in the L iqu id State Table7. Density of Water at Various Temperatures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 8. Density of Mprcury at Pressure p=lkg:cm 2 and at Various TenJjJeI'atures Table 9. Density of Various Gases anLl Vapours at O'C and '160mm Hg, . . . . . . . . Table 10. Average Density of Various Substanc.,s . . . . . _ . .. . . . . . . . ••
~_-,_....-...IIloo
22 22 24 25 27 27 29 29 30 30
31 31 3:2
32
.....
•
CONTENTS
Table I I. Moments o.f Inertia of Various Homogeneous BodIes . . " . . . . . . . . 33 Table 12. Coefficients of Sliding Friction for Various Materials . . . . . . . . . 34 Table 13. Intensity of Earth's Gravitational Field (Acceleration of Free Fall) for Different LOititudes at Sea Level . . 35 Table 14. Intensity of Gravitational Field (Acceleration of Free Fall) Near the Surface of the Sun and Planets . 35
CONTENtS
C hap t e r II. Heat and Molecular Physics
51
Fundamental Concepts and Laws . . . I. Calorimetry . . . . . . . : . . . 2. Thermal Expansion of Solids and Liquids 3. Transfer of Heat '.' '. . . . . . 4. Surface Tension of LIquIds. .. . . 5 Gas Laws . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6> Fundamentals of the Kinetic Theory of Gases
~J
C. Statics of Solid Bodies Fundamental Concepts and Laws . . . Tables . . . '.' . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 15. Centres of Gra"ity of Various geneous Bodies . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . Homo.
35 39 39
D. Elements of the Theory (If Elasticity Fundamental Concepts and Laws. . . . . . . 40 Tables. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 Table 16. Breaking Stress of Various Materials 42 Table 17. Moduli of Elasticny and Poisson's Ratios . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Table 18. Compressibility of Some Liquids at Different Temperatures . . . . . . . 44 Table 19. Allowed Stress of Various Materials 45
E. Mechanics of liqUids and Gases Pundamental Concepts and Laws . . . . . . 1. Statics . . . . • . . . . . . . . 2. Dynamics . • . . . . . . . . . . . Tables . . . " . . . . . . . . . . . . . " " Table 20. Viscosity of Various liqUids at 18° C Table 21. Viscosity of Various Gases at 0° C . Table 22. Viscosity of Water at Different Temperatures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 23. Viscosity of Glycerine, Castor Oil and Benzene at Different Temperatures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 24. Viscosity of Liquid Helium. . . . . Table 25. Viscosity of Air at Different Temperatures an d Pressures . . . . . . . . . Table 26. Viscosity of Some Metals in the Liquid State . • . . . . . . . . . . . . •
45 45 46 48 48 48 49 49 49 50 50
~~
51) 57
58
iabl~ 27. Sp'ecifi~ He~t: He;t ~f 'F~si~n', Me'lti'ng
61
and Boiling POInts : . . . Table 28. Change in Volume upen MeltIng . . Table 29. Specific Heat of Vaflous Solids at Different Temperatures . . .... . . Table 30. SpeciHc Heat cp of Water at DIfferent Temperatures . . . . . '.' : . . . . Table 31. Speciflc Heat c p of LIquId Ethyl Alcohol at Different Temperatures and Pressures .. Table 32. Specific Heat of Some .Gases at lat~ Table 33. Specific Heat cp of AIr at 20 kgcm Table 34. Speciflc Heat c of Carbon DIOXIde at 65 kg/erne .. . p. . . • . . . . . • • Table 35. Hea(~f Vaporisation at Boiling Point and Standard Atmospheric Pr~ss~re Table 36. Heat of Vaporisation of Carbon DIOXIde at Different Temperatures '.' '. . . . Table 37. Equilibrium Densities of LIquId and Vapour. Ethyl Al~o.hol . . : '. . . . Table 38. Equilibrium Densltles of LIqUId and Vapour. Water • • . . . . . . Table 39. Critical Parameters Table 40. Properties of Saturated Water ~apour Table 41. Coefflcients of Volume ExpanSIOn of Liquids 1\ at about 18 0 C '.' . . . Table 42. CoefHcients of Lil1ear ExpanSIon a of Solids at about 20° C . . . . . . . . Table 43. Surface Tension of Liquids at 20° C Table 44. Surface Tension of Water and Ethyl Alcohol at Different Temperatures Table 45. Surface Tension of Metals in the liquid State . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 46. Thermal Conductivities. . . . . . . Table 47. Coefflcients of Pressure Change at Constant Volume for Various Gases
61 62
Tables
62 63
63 64 64 64 65 65 65 66 66 67 67 68 68 69 69 70 71
CONTEXTS
CONTENTS
Table 48. Thermal Conductivities of Liquids at Various Temperatures . . . . . . . . Table 49. Thermal Conductivities of Some Gases at Standard Almospheric Pressure . : Table 50. Dependence of the Lifetime of the Planetary Atmospheres on the Escape Velocity . . . . . . . Table 51. Standard Atmosphere . Table 52. Diameters of Molecules . . . . . . . Table 53. Heats of Combustion of Some Fuels Table 54. Psychrometric Table of Relative Humidity of Air. . . . . . . . . . . . Table 55. Density, Pressure and Free Path of Nitrogen Molecules in the Earth's Atmosphere . C hap t e r III. Mechanical Oscillations and Wave Motion Fundamental Conceots and Laws 1. Harmonic 'Motion : : . . . . • • 2. The Pendulum . 3. Free and Forced Oscillations .. 4. Sound . . . . • . 5. Wave Motion . . • . . • . . . . Tables and Graphs . . . " . . . . . . . . . Table 56. Velocity of Sound in Pure Liquids and Oils. . . .. . . . . . . . . . . Table 57. Velocity of Sound in Solids at 20 c C . Table 58. Velocity of Seismic Waves . . . . Table 59. Velocity of Sound in Gases at I atm Sound Velocity Versus Pressure in Air and Nitrogen . . . .. . . Sound Frequency Spectrum. . . . . Velocity of Water Surface Waves . L~udness of Audibly Perceived Sounds . DIsplacement, Velocity and Acceleration of Water Particles due to Passage of Sound Waves of Various Intensities . . Table 60. Sound Intensity and Sound Pressure Corresponding to the Main Frequencies of the Decibel Scale .. " . . . . . . Table 61. Reflection Coefficient of Sound Waves for Various Interfaces (at Normal Incidence) . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 62. Absorption Coefficient of Sound in Different Materials (upon Reflection)
C hap t e r . 71
72 72 72 73
74 75 75 75 77 78 79 79 84 84 85 86 86 87 87 90 90 91 92 93 93
. . .
. . . . . .
94
A. The Electrostatic Field
71
~<
IV. Electricity
.-
Fundamental Concepts and Laws. . .. . • • . . . . Tables and Graphs. . .. . . . . . . . . . Table 63. Electric Field in the Earth's Atlilosphere . . . . . Table 64. Insulating Materials . . . Table 65. Dielectric Constants of Some Pure liquids . Table 66. Dielectric Constants of Gases at 18°C and Normal Pressure. .. . . . . . . Table 67. Some Properties of Ferroelectric Crystals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dependence of Dielectric Constant of Some Ferroelectrics on the Temperature and Field Intensity . Table 68. Piezoelectric Constants of Some Crystals . . . . . . . . . . • • • • . .
94 101 101 102
103 103 104 105 106
B. Direct Currents Fundamental Concepts and Laws . . . I. Electric Current in Metals 2. Current in Electrolytes 3. Current in Gases . 4. Semiconductors . 5. Thermoelectricity . Tables and Grap.hs . . .. . . . . . . . . Electric Currents in the Earth's Atmosphere Table 69. Resistivity and Temperature Coefficient of Resistivity of .Metals . . , . Table 70. Transition Temperatures to the Superconducting State for Some Metals Table 71. Alloys of High Ohmic Resistance Table 72. Allowed Current-Carrying Capacity of Insu la ted Wires for Prolonged Operation . . . . . . . c Table 73. Resistivity of Electrolytes at 18 C and Different Concentrations. . . . . . . Table 74. Thermal Electromotive Force of Some Metal Couples. . . . . . . Table 75. Differential Thermal =.m.f. (a) with Respect to Platinum . . . . . Table 76. Electrochemical Equivalents
106 106 III
113 115 116 116 116 117 118 119 119 120 121 122 123
8
CONTENTS
Table 77. Absolute Normal Potentials of Some Metals . Table 78. e.m.L of Electrochemical Cells Charging and Discharging Accumulators Table 79. Mobility of Ions in Aqueous Solutions at 18°C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 80. Mobility of Electrons in Metals . . Table 81. Mobility of Ions in Gases at 760 mm Hg c and 20 C . . . . . . . . • . • • . . Table 82. Ionisation Potentials . . . . . . . . Table 83. Emission Constants of Some Metals and Semiconductors . . . . . . . . . Table 84. Emission Constants of Films on Metals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 85. Emission Constants of Oxide-Coated Cathodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 86. Properties of Most Important Semiconductors . . . .. . Table 87. Spark Gaps for Air at 760 mm Hg .
CONTENTS
,
~
123 124 125
.~
126 126 127 127 128
D. Alternating Currents
,-
.-/
"
128 128 129 131
C. Electromagnetism Eundamental Concepts and Laws. " 131 I. The Magnetic Field. Magnetic Induction 131 2. CGSM and MKSA Systems of Units.. . . . . 133 3. Intensity of the Magnetic Fields of Currents 134 4. Work Performed in the Motion of a CurrentCarrying Wire in a Magnetic Field~ Electromagnetic Induction . . . . . 136 5. Self-Induction ". 137 139 6. Magnetic Properties of Matter. . . . Tables and Graphs. . . . . . . . . . . . . 141 Magnetic Field of the Earth .. " . . . " 141 Table 88. Properties of Some Steels Used in Electrical Engineering. . . . . . . . 142 'fable 89. Properties of Some Iron-Nickel Alloys 142 Table 90. Properties of Some Magnetically Refractive Materials. . . . . . . . . . . 143 Table 91. Properties of Magneto-Dielectrics 143 Table 92. Principal Properties of Ferrites . . . 144 Table 93. Permeability (/-1-) of Paramagnetic and Diamagnetic Nlaterials in CGSAI Units 144 Table 94. Curie Points of Metals. . . . . . 145 Table 95. Specific }vlagnetic Susceptibility of Some Metals . . . . . . . . . • . . 145
I
"
,
•
Dependence of Magnetic Perme?bi~ity and Induction on the Magnetic Field IntensIly 146 Table 96. Values of Coefficient k for Calculatin~ Inductance . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
r?
Fundamental Concepts and Laws. .. . . . . . . . . Tables and Graphs. . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . '.' . Change in Resistance upon Transltlon from DIrect to Alternating Current. . .. . . . . . Variation of Inductive Reactance, Capacitive Reactance and Impedance with Frequency Table 97. Depth of Penetration (a) of High Frequency Currents. . . .. . . . . . .
E. Electric Oscillations and Electromagnetic Waves Fundamental Concepts and'Laws . . . . The Electromagnetic Spectrum .. C hap t e r V. Optics . . . . Fundamental Concepts and Laws. I. Photometry . . . .. . . . . . 2. Principal Laws of Geometrical Optics 3. Optical Instruments . . . . . • . 4. Wave Properties of Light . . . . • . 5. Quantum Properties of Light . . 6. Thermal Radiation . . 7. Types of Spectra Tables and Graphs. . .. . . . . . . . Table 98. Relative Brightness Sensitivity (K,) for Daytime Vision . . . . . . . . . Table 99. Luminance of Some Illuminated Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 100. Luminance of Various Light Sources Table 101. Illuminance in Some Typical Cases Table 102. Reflection Coefficient (p) of Glass and Water for Difierent Angles of Incidence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 103. Reflection of Light Passing from Glass into Air . Table 104. Wavelengths of Visible Region of Spectrum . Table 105. Wavelenaths of Ultraviolet Region of Spectr'~m . . . •• • • • • •
10
CONTENTS
Table 106. Reflection of Light by Metals . . 175 Table 107. Critical Angles of Reflection . . . 175 Table 108. Wavelengths of Principal Fraunhofer Lines 176 Table 109. Index of Refraction for Wavelengths Corresponding to Some of the Fraun-, hofer Lines -- 177 Table 110. Optical Constants of Metals and~miconductors '. 177 Table 111. Index of Refraction of Gases 178 Table 112. Index of Refraction of Some Solids and Liquids , : . 178 Table 113. Dependence of Index of RefractlOn on Wavelength. " 179 Table 114. Diffuse Reflection of Some Materials in White Light . . . , . . . . . . . 180 Table 115. Specific Rotation of the Plane of Polarisation for DifIerent Wavelengths at 20 C. . . . . . . . . . 180 Table 116. Emission Spectra of Some Metals lei Table 117. Luminous Efficiency, Efficiency and Luminance of Some Light Sources 182 Table 118. Electron Work Function and Photoelectric Threshold of Various Substances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182 Table 119. Typical Characteristics of Photoelectric Cells . . . . . . . . . . . . 183 Table 120. Typical Characteristics of Photoconductive Cells. . . . . . . . . . . . 184 Table 121. Typical Characteristics of BarrierLayer Photoelectric Cells. . . . . . 185 C hap t e r VI. Structure of the Atom and Elementary Particles 186 Fundamental Concepts and Laws. .. . . . . . 186 1. Units of Charge, Mass and Energy in Atomic Physics. . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186 2. The Rutherford-Bohr Model of the Atom . . 186 3. The Atomic Nucleus and the Electron Shells 188 4. NuclelJr Transformations 189 191 5. Wave Properties of Matter. Tables and Graphs . . . . . . . . . . . 191 Energv Levels of the Hydrogen Atom . . 191 'Table 122. Mendeleyev's Periodic System of the Elements . . • •. • • • • • • • • • 192
CONTENTS
t
\
C
•
Table 123. Relative Abundance and Activify of Isotopes of Some Metals . . . . . . Table 124. Atomic Weight. Relative Abundance and Activity of Some Light Isotopes Table 125. Some Artificially Produced Elements Table 126. Elementary and Non-Elementary Particles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 127. Energies of Some Particles . . . . Table 128. Energy of a Quantum of Radiation of Different Types. . Bitlding Energy . . . . . . . . . . . Examples of Nuclear Reactions. . . . Synthesis of Helium from Hydrogen. Reactions of Nuclear SynthesIs. . . . . Units of Radioactivity and Radiation. . Appendices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I. Some Frequently Encountered Numbers II. Formulas for Approximate Calculations . . III. Elements of the Theory of Errors IV. Prefixes tothe Basic Units of Measure V. Units of Measure of Some Physical Quantities VI. Universal Physical Constants VII. MKSA System of Units • . . Subject Index. . • .. • . . . . . . , •••••
II
194 195 195 196 197 197 198 198 199 199 199 200 200 200 200 202 202 203 204 207
EXPLANATORY NOTES PREFACE The compilers of the present handbook, N. 1. Koshkin and M. G. Shirkevich, are experienced Soviet teachers. The handbook covers all the main subjects of elementary physics and contains information most frequently required in industry and agriculture. Special attention has been paid to the choice of data on the latest developments in physics, such as semiconductors, ferroelectrics, nuclear physics, etc. In addition to graphs and tables the book offers brief theoretical expositions, definitions of fundamental concepts and formulations of laws accompanied by explanations and examples. The handbook is intended for wide circles of readers in various occupa tions, and for students wi tll a background of secondary school physics.
Most of the tables are arranged in alphabetical order. Some, however, are arranged in the order of increasing or decreasing values of the tabulated quantity. The numerical values of the quantities are given to two or three significant figures after the decimal point, which is sufficiently precise for most technical calculations. The number of figures given after the decimal point varies in the tables. This is due to the circumstance that some substances can be obtained in the pure form, whereas others are complicated mixtures of substancE's. For example, the density of platinum is given to four significant figures: 21.46, whereas that of brass is given to within three units of the second significant figure: 8.4-8.7, since the density of brass varies within these limits depending on the composition of the given specimen. If the heading of a column in a table contains a factor, such as 10", this denotes that the values of the quanti ty in that column have been increased 10" times; hence, to find the true values one must divide the values given in the table by this factor. For example, in the heading of the last colUmn in Table 18: "Compr.essibility of liquids at different temperatures" (p. 44) the compFessibility ~ has been multiplied by 106 (~x 10 6 atm- I ). Thus, lhe compressibility of acetone, according 10 this table, is 111 xlO- 6 atm- I • The notes to the tables give the conditions for which the values of the tabulated quantities are va lid (if these condition:; are not indicated in the l'earling of Ple table). as \IIell
EXPLANATORY l'OTES
/
If the physical significance of the tabulated quantity is not quite clear to the reader, he should refer to the relevant section: "Fundamental Concepts and Laws". This can Ie found with the help of the table of contents or the index at the end of the book. The appendices contain information on the units of measure of physical quantities, formulas for approximate calculations, and the values of some umversal
CHAPTER. I
MECHANICS
physical constants,
,
When a body changes its position relative to other bodies it is said to be in mechanical motion. i\ change in the position of a body relative to other bodies is detrrmined by a change in the distance between the points of the bodies, The unit of distance is the meter (m). The meter is defined as 1/10,000,800 part of a quarter of the earth's meridian (the arc of the meridian from the pole to the equator) at sea level *. The unit of time is the second" *, which is defined as 1/86,400 part of a mean solar day,
A. KINEMATICS FUNDAMENTAL CONCEPTS AND LAWS Kinematics is the study of the motion of bodies without regard to the cause of that motion. The simplest moving body is a point m.ass, defined as a body whose dimensions can be neglected in describing its motion. For example, the annual motion of the earth about the sun can be regarded as the motion of a point mass. whereas the daily revolution of the earth about its axis cannot. Every solid body can be regarded as a system of rigidly bound point masses. The path described by a moving body is ca lied a trajectory . • The st3ndard meter is defined as the distance, at the melting point of ice, betwccll two marks Oil a platinum-iridium bar which is kept at the IlItcrnali anal Bureau of Wei ghts alld Measures and whi ell
was adopted
<:IS
the prototype of the mder
fere-llee nil \V"ii,-lJts ;md :V\' ,'~l:rt:" >C-O'
·Lle
S t"-JIllan!.
s{tcoud
is
llH.)f1",;
pn.:ci::.cly
()y
dcllueci
the Fi rs t Ge,;er~il Con~
uy
tbe
~.;).~.A. S\4ltc
16
CH, 1. MECHANICS
17
CONCEPTS AND LAWS
According to the form of the trajectory we distinguish between rectilinear motion (the trajectory is a straight line) and curvilinear motion (the trajectory is a curve). We also distinguish between uniform and non-uniform motion. 1. Rectilinear Motion
Uniform motion is defined as motion in which a body traverses equal distances in equal time intervals, Uniform motion is characterised by its ve locity, The velocity of uniform motion (v) is defined as the distance (s) traversed in unit time (I); s
v=t' s=vt. (1,1) Velocity is a vector quantity. It is characterised by magnitude and direction in space, The addition (composition) of ve!oci ti es is performed according to the para lle logr am 10 w (addition of vectors), The units of velocity are: cm/sec, m/sec, km/sec, km/hour. In non-uni form mati on we differentia te between instantaneous and average velocity, If a body passes over a distance Lis in the time interval from to to to Lit, then
+
vector
FUNDAMENTAL
· is also a . I Accelera t lon, 'sec" mlsecZ, at the initia~ tl\n~ ;~cderation are, cml ' t y , The um ts 0 , d by the ( quantIty. nt is determme •• n mome kmlsec2 . ·t at any gl've The veioci y (1,2.) formula: v=v o al ,
;·t
r
I
+
ve 1' 0citv. 'sitive
. t' 1 (acceleraled motion) or o 's the im 18 ( where V L 1 ation may be po t d motion The acce er I d motion), I accelera e ative (decelera e . ' d in unilorm Y \ neg d' tance traverse T~e Ibs the lormula: 1 is gIVen Y I ..L. ~2 • (1,3) -v I 2 . o· rated motion IS s. ilormly accele r and the The terminal vel
:
+
6)
h=Z'
dS
vaY = dt
is defined as the average velocity for the time interval M. In other words, if the body were moving uniformly with velocity v av , it would cover the distance Lis in the time dt. The instantaneous velocity at a given moment to is defined as the limit of the ratio: Vt o
,
dS
= I1m . , At ~
0
LJ.t
Motion in which the velocity receives equal increments
in equal time intervals is called uniformly accelerated. The rate of change of the velocity is ca lled the acceleration (a): Vt -
Vo
a=--t-' where vj is the velocity at the time t and vg is the veloe-
2. Rotational Motion . 'IS defined as b t an aXIs . lion of a point a. au circle whose centre .IS The circular, the trajeeto~y IS a dicular to the aXIS, otion in whlc e lane IS per pen axis is defined as m the axis and fPa body about 'describe circular The rolational. mhott{t t~e points 01 the a Y h t' inb whlc , mo ~on ut thisa aXIS. , ' which a bo d y turns throug motIon a a is motIon III Uniform esrotallOn 1 time intervals. rotation is defined as equal angl ,n v~i~~,y (w) of. un:form l The angu ar t out in unit tIme. the angle swep tp (1,5) w =-t ' " ,'1 through whic.h , '. e radl3ns, IS .'the an". 'anl'ular ve1oc itv. lS re m measure d 'n h It' I The lil!! t. 01 w e or> •n a nne ' "h 'lI1g u \" aI velocit .rv may the body turns I cond (radf sec ), 1 (\,' the radian per se
m;
w~os
~nd
0
2 3aK.46
III
also b unit t~ expresslCd in terms of th Hne n, or the period of rev~l~ti:beF of'{ev.olutions in W
= 2mz
\
2Jt '
w=_
' ( 1 ,6a)
T'
The linear velocitl of . fined as the in,t Y a POInt in rotational
(I,6b) .
.
:~ ~h~g~:~e~~ ~~:;~f,;~r~~yy·vrhV:~if~~g~~atrh~fJ~~7C~~~~;icISattfeoed; .e ormula: v=wR
Where R is the d i , t ' (1 7) ta tion. s il11ce from the point to th . ' . In the case of non-un' .' e aXIS of 1'0Instantaneous a d ,Iform IOtatlOn we dist" . has turned throu~h :;e:~gre ~~g~lar ~eloCiti~~.gUH\~:tbveen g angular ffroomthto to av I' e time !:1t is
~1;1i~e~heasaverage
velo~i;; a(~lm)e
oThe ' limit of this I' a t·IO us angular velocity W fo
=
lim f1t ->
the instantane_
WI -
Wo
+'t1.
'Or -- v
G'=--_,_2
(1, lab)
where v is the linear velocity, (0 - the ilngular Yelocity, and R.- the radial distance of the point from the axis of lotation. The total acceleration of a point of a body in uniform rotation is (1,11)
3. Motion of Bodies. in the Earth's Gravitational Field
Fig. 1 illustrates the trajectories of bodies which are projected from point A near the surface of the earth wi th difIerent velocities *. In all cases the velocity is directed hori· zontally. The trajectory is a circle if the velocity of the body V at point A is such that the acceleratiun of free fall 2
g is equal to the centripetal acceleration ~- (R is the radius W
o
is
In uniforml any point of accelerated rotation the r (1,8) recti on. The C~:'l body varies both in ma~~~~~dvelocitJ: v of e e and I,n dicharacterised by"t1 In magnitude of the Ii le tangent lUI acceleration: near velocl ty is
f
(1, lOa)
/.1t '
w'here wf is the a , t the initial angular ~~lll~~~t/elocity at the time t, and wf -w 0
where Vt and V o are the linear velocities at the time t and at the initial moment of time. At any given point of the trajectory the direction of a c coincides with the direction of v. The tangential acceleration a, is related to the angular acceleration j by the formula: ac = jR. However, even when a body is in uniform rotation the points of the body are in accelerated motion, for the direction of their velocity is continually changing. Tbe acceleration of this motion is directed towards the axis of rotation (i.e., perpendicu lar to the direction of the linear veloci ly) and is callpd the centripe tal accelerat ion:
,!:1lp 0
Rot~tional motion in which equal Increments in equal t· the angular velocity accelerated. Ime Intervals is calJed receives , T!Je angular acceleration 0 . uniformly (J) IS defined as the rate f fhunlformly accelerated t . o c ange of th ro atton e angular velocity: j =
<
t~ + ~t
!:1lp
=M is, by definition,
Way
19
FUNDAMENTAL CONCEPTS AND LAWS
CH. 1. MECHANICS
of the trajectory, which can be taken equal to the radius of the earth). Hence v=1/Rg~7.93 km/sec. If the velocity of the body at point A is greater than 7.93 km/sec but less than 11.2 kmjsec, then the trajectory is an ellipse; the fOCllS of the ellipse nearer to the poinl of departure (point A) lies at the centre uf.'he earth. (ihis ellipse
\.
• The resistance
oj
the ai r is neglected.
2'"
20
CH, I. MECHANICS
is, depicted by a solid line in FIg. I,) If the velocity of the body e.quals 11.2 kmj<;ec, then the t.ra)~ctory is a panbola. If the Initial \,elocity is greater .~han 11.2 kmi\ec, tlien the traJectory becom~ a hyperbola. In the last two t:ases fhe body !eaves the earth and goes ofi"into mterl? lanetary space. The least veloCl ty required for a body to leave the earth is sometimes Fi!-f, I, Trajectories of bodies In lhe earlh's gravilalional caIled the escape velocity. The field. path. of a body moving with velocity less than 7 93 k / represents an arc of an ellipse (dotted lin ' F" g 1 m sec dIstant focus coincides with the centre o~ ;~. I ·th ) whose If the velocity is much less pear . ihan 7,93 km/sec the path may be regarded as parabolic, and the acceleration of free fall may be considered constant in magnitude and direction. If a body is projected from the surface of the earth at an angle a with the horizonta I with an initial velocity v;' much less than v = 7.93 km/sec, then in this case, too, the acceleration of free fall may be considered constant in magnitude and direction, while the surface of the earth may be regarded as flat. The trajectory will then be a parabola (Fig. 2), The f3nge (S) and the maximum height formulas:
S=
Fig. 2, Trajeclories of lJodies projecled from lhe surface of the earth wi th veloci ty Vo =550 m/sec. Curve I-angle of projecti on a = 2 0°, curve II - angle of projection a=;=700, curve III-angle of p,roleclton a=20°, with air reo Slstance taken into account.
The maximum range corresponds to the 3nr(1e u = 45°. If the resistance of the air is taken into account the range and the height of the trajectory are less. For example, in th~ absence of air resistance a body thrown at an angle a=20° with an initial velocity va = 550 m/sec would have a range of 19,8 km, whereas a projecti Ie fired at the same angle and with the same initial velocity would have 3 range of only 8,1 km. TABLES Table 1 Velocity of Motion of Different Bodies
2,330 860
m,'scc
2,500 abo11t 8,000' more than II, (lOO • ..
;>(1,000
I>
10'·
up
to
3XIO"
Table 2
1
Accelerati on, m/sec:!
Subway trai n •••
where Vo is the initial velocity of the body. The ral1~e w1l1 be the same for two values of the angle of proJection: a! and a 2 , where u 2 = 90· - a i •
up t.o 90-100 k,;,/hou1" 140 140 150 415 634.2 • up to 1,000 2,000
Acceleration of Different Bodies (Approximate Values)
(H) are calculated by the
(1,12)
1.5<3.5
Elevator inhouse . • • • . SUbway trai n , , , . , , , . Electric locomotive VL-23 Automobile ZIL-lIO , , . . , . , . , , Passenger train diesel locomotive TE-7 Torpedo boat . . . , , . • . . . . Passenger plane IL-14 , . , , , • . . . Raci ng car (1947 world record) • . . • . . . Passengor jet p'lane TU-104 • • • • . • • . , Jet fighter plane. , . . • • • • • , . , . , . Jet plane "Nord 1,500 Griffon 02" (1959 world record) . . • • , . . • • • • • • , , Bullet at exit from gun muzzle . • • • • , , Moti on of electron beam over screen of television set KVN·49 • • • • . • • • • . • Orbital velocity of artificial earlh satellite Cosmi c rocket " . . . . . , . Velocity of earth on its orbi t . Electrons in cathode-ray tube • Electrons in betatron • . . . .
Accelerated motIon
v~ sin 2a v~ si11 2 a ,H=-_g 2g
21
TABLES
Racing car •••• Elevator in house Passenger trai n •. Tramcar • . • • . Shell in gun barrel
4.5 0,9-1.6
0.35 0.6 500,000
DeceleraDecclcr.\'ted motion \.
Emergency braking of automobile •. , Landing jct plane , , Parachute openi ng when rale of fall is GO m/sec . . • . . .
tion,
\
misec:J:
4-5 5-8 aboul 60
22
FUNDAMENTAL CONCEPTS AND LAWS
CH. I. MECHANICS
Table 3 Escape Velocities in the Solar System Mean radius of the earth ;",";.370 km. Mass of the th 5.96 .~027g ear
~'I
Radius (Earlh= 1)
Body
Mass (Earlh= I)
1 Sun . • .
109.1 0.39
Mercury Venus . . EmtlI •. MOOll M3fS
11.97
1.00
•••. .••.
Jupiter Saturn
... .•....
Uranus . . . . . l\CptUllC
.... e a
w
U:
••.. :
u.n 0.53 10.95 9.02 4.(JO 3.92
I
Escape velocity, kmisec
322.100 0.044 0.82 1.00 0.0123 0.108
317. I 94.9 1 I}. 65
17. 16
623 3.8 10.4
11.2 2.4 5.1 60. I
36.6 21.6 23.9
B. DYNAMICS FUNDAMENTAL CONCEPTS AND LAWS
.Dynamics deals with the laws of motion f b d' Ilith the factors which cause or h.. . 0 o. les and change in the motion or sh e f c ange thIS motIOn. Any interaction of at I~ast two baPd' 0 a body is a result of the Th h' . 0 les, bodie~ ~ YSljfld quantIty. characterising the interaction of or the ~~;;gee of asl~~c:: ~} ~ebe;~~n~~ bho~hc.hange of motion. Force IS a vector qua t·t Th dd" simultaneously actina on na 0 .e a ItJon of two force:s the parallelogram (addition of v~ctl~r~~rformed according to
\td
1. Laws of Dynamics b d . Newton's First Law of Motion E' a state of rest or uniform motiOl; i \ ery ? y c~ntInues in it is compelled to change that stat ab st~~lght Itl!e, ~nless some external force. e y e applIcatIOn ci That property of matter by virtue of which a b d ~o retam the magnitude and direction of ·t I.t 0 y tends IS called inertia. The change in th~ s vet?cl y unchanged y depends, in addition to the external for;~o a bto.d , ~nontlof 1e quan tty
23
of matter in the body. The greater the quantity of matter in the body, the stronger is the tendency of the body to "reserve a constant velocity, the greater is the inertia of the body. Thus, the quantity of matter in a body determines the physical property of inertia. The measure of inertia is the mass of the bodY. Newton's Second Law of Motion The force acting on a body is equal to the product of the mass of the body and the acceleration produced by this force, and coincides in direction with the acceleration. Thus, Newton's second law of motion gives the relation between the app lied force (F), the mass of the body (m) and the resulting acceleration (a): (1,13) F = mao The motion of a body may be characterised by 3nother quantity, called the momentum, K = mv. If the applied force is constant, then
or
Ft=rnvt-mvo'
(1,14)
The quantity Ft is called the impulse. The change in momentum is equal to the impulse of the force and takes place in the gjrection of action of the force. Newton's Third Law of Motion. When one body exerts a force on another, the second body exerts 3. force equal in magnitude and opposite in direction on the first body
=m,a, = F1
or
F2,
m 2 a2 ,
(1,15)
where F, is the force acting on the first body, F 2 - the force acting on the second \'ody, m, and m2 - the mas~5 of the first and second bodies; respectively. A system of bodies which interact only with other bodies of the same system is called closed In a closed system the momentum rema ins constant. For example, in a system consisting of two bodies the following relation is satisfied: m,u, +m2 u2 = m,v, +m2 v 2 , (1,16) where v, and v 2 are the ve loci ties of the first and second bodies before interaction, and u, and .''2 - the respective velocities after interaction.
24
~~.
MECHANICS
FUNDAMENTAL COKCEPTS Al'i'D LAWS
The mass per unit volume of a substance is called density (p). The concept of specific gravity is frequently used. Specific gravity (d) is the ratio of the density of a substance to the density of water:
The potential energy in the (ield of graoit at ion of the earth is defined as . mEm (1,23) F- p = ". Y-'R'
m P=v'
d
(1,17)
P
=
V
where 'Y is the gravitational constant (p. 27), mE is the mass of the earth, m - the mass of the borly, and R - the d.istance from the centre of the earth to the' centre of gravIty of the body. The minus sign in formula (1,23) den.otes that whe.11 the body is removed to an infinitely great dIstance (when It is out of the field of gravitation), 'its potential energy is taken to zero; hence. tbe energy of bodies situated at a finite distance is negative. . When a body is raised to a small heIght above the surface of the earth the gravitational field of the earth may be regarded as homogeneoL!s (the. acceleration of free fall i$ constant in magnitude '.-Jnd elIrectlOn). In a homogeneous field the potential energy of a body equals
(1,18)
where m is the mass of the body, P - its weight, V _ its volume.
2. Work, Power and Energy
Work (A) in physics is defined 85 the product of the force and the distance through which it acts. If the force does not coincide in direction with the distance, then the work equals: A=FScosa,
(1,19)
where a is the angle between the force and the distance through which the body moves. Power (N) is defined as the work performed in unit time:
Ep=mgh,
A
T'
(I,20a)
N=Fv.
(1,20b)
N=
3. Dynamics of Rotation Newton's second lam for rotational molion takes the f'Orm: M-Jj. (l,24)
(1,21)
There are two forms of mechanical energy: kinet ie energy (E k ), or the energy of motion, which depends on the relative velocity of the bodies, and potential energy (E p ) Of the energy of position, which depe'nds on the relative posi-
Here the moment of inertia (J) is analogous to the mass, the torque (M) - to the force.' and the angular acceleration (j) - to the linear acce!eratlOn. The torque or moment of force IS defined as the product of the force and the perpendicula.r distance. between the Illle of action of the force and the aXIs of rotatIOn. . If two torques are applied to a body, produclI1~ rotation in opposite directions, then one of the torques IS arbItrarily considered positive, and the other negatIve.
tion of the bodies. The kinetic energy of a body equals:
E _ mv 2
k-T'
(l,22~
where m is the mass of the body, and v - its velocity•
.-:-.-. .'liniiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiii
(I 23a)
where m is the mass of the body, g - the acceleration of free fall, h - the height of the body measured f.rom some arbitrary level, at which the va lue o~ the potential energy is taken equal to zero. The surface at the earth can serve, for example, as sL,c:h an arbitrary level.
When work is performed in
E,-E 2 =A.
25
\i.'
-
_
"n
26
or
CH. I. MECHANICS
FUNDAMENTAL CONCEPTS AND LAWS
The moment of inertia (or rotary inertia) of a point mass about an axis is equal to the product of the mass and the square of its distance from the axis:
J = mR·. (1,25) The moment of inertia of a body is the sum of the moments of inertia of the point masses of which the body is composed. The moment of inertia of a body can be expressed in terms of its mass and dimensions. The moment of inertia of a body about an axis can be determined if we know the moment of inertia of the body about a parallel axis passing through the centre of gravity of the body (see p. 34). the mass of the body m and the distance between the two axes S:
+
J =J e.g. mS·. (1,26) In uniform rotational motion the sum of all the torques is equal to zero. The uniform motion of a point in a circular path (.,miform circular motion) is characterised by centripetal acceleration (which causes the velocity to change in direction\ and can take place only if a force acts to produce this acceleration. This force is applied to the point which is describing circular motion and is called the centripetal force: mv'
4. Friction When two solid bodies in contact are in motion relative to each other, a force arises which hinders this motion. 1"his force is called friction. It is caused by the irregularities @f the surfaces in contact, as well as by molecular forces of interaction. When there is no layer of liquid between the surfaces we speak of dry friction. .... According to the character of the motion glvmg flse to dry. friction we distinguish sliding friction (one body slides over the surface of the other) and rolling friction (one body rolls on the surface of the other). The magnitude of sliding friction FIr depends on the nature and quality of finish of the surfaces in contact and on the force pressing the surfaces bgether (the perpendicular force F pl.
Flr=kF p ,
(1,31)
where k is the coeffiCient of frief ion; k depends on the nature and quality of finish of the surfaces in contact, and to a ;;light degree on the velocity of motion (!he depe!1den~e on the velocity is usual1y neglected). RollIng fnchon l~ less than sliding frictiol., Rolling friction depends on the radIUS R of the rolling bodY, on the force pressing the surface. together, and on the quality of the surfaces:
Fe=R'
(1,27 a)
Flr=k' ;, ,
F e =mw R.
(I,27b.
where k' is a quantity characterising the surfac~s in contact; k' has the dimensions of a length. The followmg are two examples of the value of k' in cm:
2
The centripetal force is directed along the radius toward' the axis of rotation and its torque is equal to zero (the perpendicular distance betWeen the force and the axis is zero). The work done when a constant torque acts through an angle cp in rotational mot ion equals
A=Mcp.
(1,28~
The power developed equals
N=Mw.
(1,29}
The kinetic energy of a rotating body equals Jw
2
Ek=--z .
(1,30)
A wheel with a steel rim on a steel track A cast iron wheelan a steel track
(1,32)
0.05 0.12
5. Law of Universal Gravitation The force of attraction F between two point masses I7l.t and m. equals:
mIm. F =y~,
(1,33)
where R is the distance between the masses, and y is the constant of gravUaf ion, equa I to 6.67 X 10 - 8 cm' jg sec 2 (in the CGS system of units*). The constant of gravitation is a • See p. 204 for the CGS system of units.
28
quantity equal to the force of attraction between two point masses of uni t mass separated by unit distance. In the case of homogeneous spheres of mas';e'o Tn, and Tn 2 the force of attraction is given by the same formula, except that R now denotes the distance bdween the centres of the spheres. The weight P of a body of mass m on the surface of the earth is determined mainly by the force of attraction between the body and the earth: m"Tn P=y~, RE
Tn E
g=y
+ H)2 , Ri
(R E
(l,34a)
where go is the acceleration on the earth's surface. In the first approximation for H ~ R E
g:::::::go(1-2R~)'
TABLES
Table 4 Density of Some Solids (at 20°C)
Substance
Dcnsity, g/cm a
Substance
(1,34b)·
At the centre of the earth the intensify of the gravitational field is equal to ze· roo If the earth is regarded as a homogeneous sphere then g increases with increasing distance from the centre of the earth. Outside the earth g decreases with increasing distance from the centre of the earth; the depemlence of the acceleration g on the distance Fig. 3. Acceleration of gravity (in· tensitv of gravitational field) versus R from the centre of the distance from centre of earth. (The earth is depicted in the earth is regarded as a homogeneous form of a graph in Fig. 3. sphere.)
Aluminium Brass Bronze Cast iron Chromi urn Cobalt Constantan Copper . . Duralumin Germanium Gold Iron Lead Magnesium Manganin . Molybdenum Neptunium Nickel . Nickeline Platinum Silicon Silver Sodium Steel Tin Tungsten Uranium . . . White babbitt Zlnk
Minerals 2.7 8.4-8.7 8.7-8.9 7 7.15.. 8.8 \. 8.8R 8.93 2.79 5 :3 19.31 7.S8 11.35 1.76 8.5 10.2 19.5 8.9 8.77 21.46 2.3 10.5 0.970 7.7·7.9 7.29 19.31 19.1 7.1 7.15
AnthraCl te (dry) Asbestos Chalk (ai r dry) Diamond Emery Granite Marble Quartz
0.6-0 .8 0.4 0.5-0 .6 1.1-1.3 1.1-1.4 0.7-0.9 li. 4-(J. 5 0.6·0.7
1.2-1.5
o. 1-0.5
2 3.51
4 2. 5~3 2.5-2.8
:!.G5
Plastics ffnd
II laminated
plastics
Cellon . . Fluoplaslic Laminated aminoplasts Phenoli c plastic. impregnated Plex;gLs . . . . . Polvacrylate (orp;ani c glasS) . . . . Polystyrene . . Polyvinyl plastic I Teflon Textoli te Vi nyl pLisli c 'I
1.3 2.1-2.3 1.4 I .34·1.4 1.18
I
1.2 1. 06 1.34-1 .4 2.2 1.3·1.4 1.38-1.40
Different materials Aml)cr Bakeli te varni sh Beeswax, white Bone Glass. common Glass. for mt rror3. Glass, for t!lermo-
Wood (air dry) AIlh. mahogany Bamboo Cedar Ebony Lignum vitae Oak, beech Pine Walnut
Dcnsity, g/cm::l
Metals and alloys
where mE is the mass of the earth, and R E is the radius of the earth. In accordance with the law of gravitation, the acceleration of gravity (the intensity of the gravitational field) at a height H above the surface of the earth is given by .the formula: or
2'9
TABLES
CH. I. MECHANiCS
meters
I
I Glass.
pyrex Glass. quartz lee (at (J0C)
•.
. . I "I,ea . I }Jorcf'lain h~.!lhh('r. onlin;;,y, I
I
II
hard
•••
.
1.1 I .4 0.95-0.96 1.1'-2.0 2.0 2.55
2.59 2. ,)9 2.21 (J.!) 17
".li-3.2 I
q
,'
------------=-,.,.....-~-.._-.
30
CH, J. MECHANICS
TABLES
Density of Liquids (at 20°C) Li qui d
Densi ty, go/em:l
Liqlli d
Table 7 Density of Water at Various Temperatures (g/em')
Densi ty, go/em a
t. Acetic acid Acetone Aniline. Benzene Benzine Bromine
..
Bromobenzcnc Chloroform . . Crude oil Diiodomethane Ethyl alcohol . Formic acid . . Glycerine . . . . Heavywater (ll~O)
1.049 0.791 1.02 0.R79 0.G8·0.72 3.12 1.495 1.489 o .76-0.85 3.325 0.79 1.22 1.26 I. 1086
Heptane •• 0.684 Hexane . . . 0.660 I Machine oil 0.9 Mercurv . ' . 13.55 Methyl alcohol. , 0.792 Mi lk of average fat content. 1.03 Nitric acid . . 1.51 Ni trobcnzene 1.2 Nitroglycerine 1.6 Sea water 1.01·1.03 Toluene " ' " 0.866 Tri bromomethane .. 2.890 Vaseline oil 0.8 Water . 0.99823
Density of Some Metals in the Liquid State Substance
Aluminium
Temperature, °C 660 900 1.100
Table 6
°C
-10
I
I t,
Densi ty 0.99815 0,99843 0.-99869 0.99892 0,99912 0,99930 0.99945 0.99958 0.99970 0.99979 0,99987 0.99993 0.99997 0.99999 1.00000 0.99999 0.99997
-9 -8 -7 -6 -5 '""4
-3 -2 -1
o
1 2 3 4
5 6
°c 7 8 10 11 12 13 14 15 IG 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
I
Density
lit,
0,99993 0,99988 0.99973 O.999li3
°c
I
25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 40 50 60 70 80 90
0,~9952
0.99940 0.99927 0,99913 1-. 0.99897 0.99R80 0,99862 0.90843 0,99823 0.99802 0.99780 0,99757 0.99732
Densi ty 0,99707 0,99681 O. ~9G52 0,99622 0,995D2 0.99,'61 0,99521 0.99479 0,9943G 0,99394 0.99350 0,99118 0.98804 0,98318 0.97'171 0,97269 0.96534
Density, g . :cm:l 2.380 2.315 2.261
300 600 962
10.03 9.66 9.20
Gold
1.100 1,200 1.300
17.24 17.12 17.00
Lead
400 600 1.000
10.51 10.27 9.81
Si lver
960.5 1,092 1.300
9.30 9.20 9.00
Sodium
100 400 700
0.928 0.854 0.780
Tin
409 574 704
G,834 6.729 6.640
Gi SITlllth
31
Table 5
Note, The maximum density of water corresponds to the temperature 3.98°C.
Table 8 Density of Mercury at Pressure p=1 kg/em' and at Various Temperatures
t. OC'
p, glcm'
0 5 10 15 20
13.5951 13.5827 13.5704 13.5580 13.5457
III. °C I p,
I i
I
25 30 35 40 45
I
g, cm'
13.5335 13,5212 13.5090 13.4967 13.4845
III. °C I p, 50 55
GO
65 70
glcm'
13.4723 13.460 I 13.4480 13.4358 13.42 :17
I I. °C I I i
75 80 90 100 300
p, g/cm'
13.4116 13.3%5 13. :i753 13,3:)14 12.875
CH, 1. MECHAi-JICS
32
Density of Various Gases and Vapours at Substance Acetylene Air . . . • Ammonia. Argon .... Benzene (saturated) . . . . . . • Carbon di oxi de Carbon monoxide ':l1lorine . . , . . Ethyl alcohol (saturated)
TABLES
ooe
Density, g/cm 3
Density, g/em 3
Substance
0,001173 0,001293 0,000771 0,001783
Ethyl etller (s~turated) . Helium, Hydrogen Krypton Neon . . Nitrogen . . Oxygen . Ozone . \V ~tel v"pollr (sail turated)
0.000012 0.001977 0.00125 0.00322 0.000033
II
0.00083 0.0001785 0.00008988 0.0031'1 0.000900 0.001251 0.001429 0.002139
Table 11 Morncnts of !ncL ia of Varicu5 Homogeneous Bodies Moment of i nerti a J
Tbin bar of length I
Perpcndi cular to bar and .
Table 10
ml' 12
---------cutar to plane of
C!fClllar disk or cylitHlcr 01 radi us r
Density, kgm'
600 Asbestos felt . 850-900 Asbestos paper 2,120 Asphalt . . . . 650 Beets . . . • • 250 Broadcloth . • . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ... 1,000-2,000 Clay. 15-20% moisture content by weight. Concrete mi xed wi th crushed rock, 0% moisture 2,000 content by weight . 1,600 Concrete dry . . . . 750 Corn (grai n) . . . . . 80 Cotton wool, air dry 300-1,200 Foam concrete . . 1,840. Gravel. air dry 50 Hay, fresh·mown 100 Hay, compressed . . . . . . .. Lime plaster, 6-8% moisture content Lv weight........ 1,100 Masonry, red brick I ,GOO-I, 700 • ,silicate brick, . 1,700-1,900 Mipor (microporous rubbel') not more than 20 Peas •.......•.. 700 Potatoes . . . . 670 Pressboard (made of recds). . 2GO·3GO Reinforced concrete. 8(;/~ rnoi~Lure contcnt by weight • . . . . . 2,200 Sand........ 1,2,00-1,600 Sandstone 2, GOO Silk. . . . . . . . . 100 Slag, bbst-fl!rIlclcC GOO-800 " . t f.urndcc . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9UO·l,300 Slag-concrete, 13% moisture 10nlcntbY\\l'i:\ 1,:,OD Snow. fresh-fallen bU-190 Woollen cloth 210 Wool! ell klt ..:....:.-~..:......:.-;....:....:... . .:..I .:..~.:..O_() _
I
_~~~_l_OUgb its cen-I
0.000484
Average Density of Various Snbstances Substance
33
Table 9 and 760 mm Hg
Sphere of radi us r
2
J_~ al!~Ci('r of sphere
Thi n cylindric'al lUbe or ring of r~dius r .
0.4 mr' ----------'------
I,\xi s of tube I
I
'e:;ircularcylirjdcr of lengthl land radi us r
mr'
kular to axis of and passi ng its centre
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ n
Rectangular parallelepiped of di mensi OIlS :la. 2b. 2r.
mr'
;] nd P;lS5i ng i t5 ceil tre
- '
/\xis
P.1S~:i Tl!!
_
through
cC'llirc Lllid 'parallel to (~C :!a
m
si
Note, The table gives the of inertia of bodies about axes which pilSS 1hrou~~h t lH:ir ty. The moment of inertia about <.111 .;~rl»itrf~lry ;_~x:_" ran Lc. ,\(((Jflhng to formula (1,26). For ~xdmplc, t"e ,mun,cllt (}f Illertla of a tllln lJ.l1 about an aXIs pendlculnr to the [Jar and passing thruugh one of its ends is: per-
3. 3aK,46
34
CH. I. MECHANICS
FUND\MEXTAL CONCEPTS AND LAWS
Table 12 Coefficients of Sliding Friction for Various Materials
fri cti on
- - - - - - -'~----Bronze on bronze stecl Cast i ron on bronze " 011 cast iron Copper on cast iron . Dry wood on \Vood Fluoplastic-4 on fluoplastic Fluoplastic on stainless steel Greased lea1her belt on melal Hempen rope. wet, on oak dry. 011 oak lee on ice . lron·bound runners on snow and ice Leather belt, moist. on metal on oak dry. on met"l Metal. moist. on oak dry. on oak . . • . Oak on oak. along grai n along grai n of one surface <.lod across grain of other Rubber (ti res) on hard soi I on cast iron SJidi ng beari ng, greased . . Steel (or cast i ron) on ferrodo Steel on iron . . . . . icc (skates) • steel:f; ••• • cast iron'" . Steel-ri mmed wheelan steel track Wooden runners on snow and ice.
__L_atitUde
0.2 0.18 0.16 0.27 0.25-0.5 0.052-0.086 0.064-0.080 0.23 0.33 0.53 0.028 0.02 0.36 0.27-0.38 0.56 0.24-0.2U 0.5-0.6 0.48 0.34 0.4-0.6 0.83 0.02-0.08 0.25-0.45 0.19 0.02-0.03 0.18 0.16 0.16 0.035
Acceler.at.ion, __ cm ,ec'
I
~)n
II
II II
J\cceleraticn. CI_II_S_.C_c,_'
~ti tlld_P_ _---'
11 __ .
Ii
.O:lO
978. 18t; 978.634 979.321 980.16b D8I .066
0.21
Note. The asterisk denotes materials used in braking and frictional devi res.
Table /.'J Intensity of Earth's Gravitational Ficld (Accrleration of Free Fall) for Different Latitudes at Sea Level
Coeffi ci ent of
Surfaces in contact
35
sS
c;
4 j ' CMosco-\\-)
~lS
1 .5:': 3 I . qc<~
:JQ";J7' (LclIingri.ld)
~)K
(i(J
981.914
0
71)0 80" 90"
SHU .GOG
t)";;.058 98J.21G
II Table 14 Intensity of Gravitational Field (Acceleral ion of Free Fal!) near the Surface of the Sun and Planets Body
I Accek.flltiOn. cms~c:':
il
Acccle.,rat.ioll'l em, sec:::! I
Body
._---Sun . . . Mercury \' en us Earth . Mars . .
27,400 38(8J.~ 98039:2
IIJuPiter. I S,alurII . '[' :'
..
.1
:I
2.650 I. 17 () 9SO 980 Hi 7
- - - - '1 '------
C. STATICS OF SOLID BODIES FUNDAMENTAL CONCEPTS AND LAWS
Statics deals with the conditions of equilibrium of a body or system of bodies. If a number of forces are acting on 3 body at rest (in equilibrium), such that the directions of the forces intersect in a single point, then the body will remain at res! (in equilibrium) when the vector sum of these forces is zero. The forces may be displaced along their line of action. Centre of gravity of a solid body or system of bodies. Every particle of a body is subjec1ed to the pull of gravity.
3*
37
2G
CII. I. MECI!J\:'JICS
The condilion ti at the slim of the monH'nh of ~11 ttie forces equal zero abo applies to the cquililJriul1l uf a v.:i~ul lass (Fig. 6).
The r, --,Ulti!llt (slim) d JIl the force; of grnvitv ~cting on the of tbe ho'Y j.; ellie:1 the [~'eight of tbe hody. centre oj wavily is cal Il" I tIl" ]Joint "hOLi! which the 511111 of the moments of the forces of gravity acting on all tbe p:,rLcle, of the i; e'lui!! to zero. Tbe weight of the boriv nuy Ll' eonc,.~lIti'idl':i at its centrl' of gravity. Type, of equilibrium. Whl'll a body relurlls to iis original po..;ition c:ficr being ~~,ight1y di:;p1:.lceJ, th2 cquil1brlUI11 !') said to be stabie When a body tl'nds to move iiS far a:; ]J()';sible [rom its or i gir::J1 position when ,lightly displac2d, the eqUilibrium is callccl unstable. A body is in nwtl'al pquilihriLim, if, when slightly displacerl, it lends neither to return to its original position nor to move further awav fr0111 it, in other words, when the new position is also a jJo~itio!l of equilibrium. Conditions of equilibrium of a body on ~n inclined plane. For ~ body of weight P to be in equilibrium on an inclined plane which nukes an :mg1e a with the horizontal it must be subjected to a force F equal to F,: -///"
/
'\\
\,
'\
\'2
~:;:.,.,. ,~" .t. .". . .". -.,.~~::~l __
:/-/~/;>;;::/I//'-/~//"";'//,, '"////'P~///,,.,,////-//-////;;Y///
Fig. 4. EqlliH
(Jil
~1l'
~--Y···l---' '2
a)
Fi~.
a)
Flllcru ill between forres
{!} :)
~ct i
f) FldCrlllll
F 2 =P cos a,
whi Ie the inclined plane react'S on the boely with an equa! force. A body rc"Un,S; fceely on an inclined plane will remain at rest ai long a, t!le force pulling it down is less than the furce of friction. This condition is satisfied if tan a
> 11,
where k is the coefficient of sliding friction. The lever. A lever is in equilibrium if the Sllm of the moment'S of all the forces "pplicd to it equals zero (Figs. 5, a and G, b). F,a - F 2 {;==O, where a and b are the lever arms of the applied forces.
01~C
Pulleys. The fixed pIllle\' (Fir:_ 7) 'erves only to change the direction of the applied force. The muvable plilley ~Fi[;. d)
~",~J.W4'$
t".
the force F must be directed l!pw~rd along the inclined plane (Fig. 4). The boely itself presses nown on the inclined plane wi th a force
inclined
at
clld ut
F,=P sin a;
,, ",,/
b
a
f I
F'
F
'p
.p p
Fig. 6. Schematic ctiagralfl of windlass (FXR=PXr).
Fil~_;. 7. <;"'ChC;)];lri ngram of fi :\cd
Pi,g".
,"-. Sc 1't-'m,ltic
dia!~Tarn
gives us a gain ill force. Whe)1 ;l mO'/11ble jJ111 or in uniform roLt!iotl 1he lil d il fh' :Ippli the sum of all tbe m(),rtteub h eqlLd tu Z'.';l),
lllUV·
"11k
is ~t rest iuree: and
CH. I. MECHAKICS
38
TABLES
Hence it follows that
39
TABLES
Table 15 Centres of Gravity of Various Homogeneous Bodies (see fig. 11)
P=2F,
or P
F= 2 . 0,
Body
Pulley blocks. A pulley block (Fig. 9) is a combination fixed and movable pulleys. If the block contains n mov-
Position of centre of gravity
Thin bar Cylinder or prism
At the centre of the bar In the middle o[ the straight line connecting the centres of the bases of the cylinder or
Sphere Flat thi n circular seg· ment Pyrami d or cone
At the centre of the sphere On the axis of symmetry at ' \ of its height
prism
Hemi sphere Thin solid triangular plate
ahove the base On the str:light line connecting the centre tlH~_hase and lhe <.lpCX at 1/ 4 the dis~ irom the base of s).'mrnetry at the radi us from c(,lltre of tile sphere At the point of intersection of the mediaI'1'S
oo I
t Fig.
q.
P,illey
Pi g. 10. J ack~crcw.
block.
able and n fixed pulleys, then counteract the force P equals
the
force F required to
F=£.. 2n .
I
TI ott I I
....--r -.. .
The screw. In the absence of friction the force P acting along the axis of the screw is bulanced by a force F applied to the circumference of the screw Glp and equill to
Ph
F=~R--· ~:1 "
where R is the rar!ius of the screw cap and h - the pitch 01 the screw (Fig. 10).
;Fig. 11. Po::itio!l ::;f centre of gravit,,' of some bodies of r~gular gc,,11l1et.ri cal
shape~
----.~-~-----------40
41
CH. J. MECHANICS
FUNDAMENTAL CO:\,CEPTS A:\D LAWS
D. ELEMENTS OF THE THEORY OF ELASTICITY
is the ultimate stress or breakillf'. s['re,s - (h: ~ire;;s 1~7d 'h' I 'trietion arises on the rod. fl v Is 1e {II . der t~CtI asfroe~~ under which the material hec;ins to 110w P
u't
FUNDAMENTAL CONCEPTS AND LAWS Under the action of extcma I forces a solid body undergoes a ch,lJJgc in shape, or is deformed. If, when the forces are removed, the body resumes its original shape, the deformation is said to be elastic. When a body undergoes eli:stic deformation internal ellstic forces (restoring forces) arise which tend to rbtore lhe body to its original shape, The magnitude of these forces is proportion a I to the deforma t ion. Deformation by tension and by compression. The increase in length (111) of a body produced by an cxterna I force (F) is proportional to the magnitude of the force and to the original length (1), and is inversely proportional to the cross-sectional area (5):
I IF I1l=E X t,-,
(I,35a)
I
where
E
is a coefficient of proportionality.
Formula (I,35a)
is the mathematical expression of Hooke's law. The quantity E is ca lIed Young's modulus, and characterises the elastic properties of the material. The ratio : =p is ca lled the stress. The deformation of rods of arb i trary length and cross-sectiona I area is described by a quantity called the longitudip
M · 1',=7'
na 1 s tram
Fif' 12. Stress versus longitudina strai n. Curve 1 - plasti c material, curve 1/- brittle material. At point 0 fracture occurs.
For bodies of arbitrary shape Hooke's law is: p=Ee. (1,35b) Young's modulus is numerically equal to the stress required to double the length of a hody. Actually, however, rupture occurs at considerably sma IleI' stre-;ses. Fig. 12 represents in graph form the eX!JPrirnenL:Ily detc>rrni!ll'd relation iJel\\eec p and (;, where
f;~~ dcfo~~lation . incrc3se1s .~\ Itl;o.,:t[ anYe 11:~I;~~I'~t/~:stl~el~~~
lied force), Pcl IS the e as.l.c dilL" t. " Pl' I H ke's law is vahd.'· . WllCl .00 if' d os britlle aGd plastiC. Bnttle maMateI'lals are classl Ie u, .'\';. 'Ire pc-oduccd • . I d t 'oved when verv Sl11i1 I sera ,n, , . , .enathem, s arc Brr e~ttl1eJ ' .rna t e]']3 ' I 's , C8n lIst'ally \\ithstand greater .in . , compression than, tension. '1: > I ]1'1 a dccrea,e in the diamTensile stra1I1. IS acclfon:PddL,ec!'w" chari'!c in the diameter, eter of the specJrT]en. Ll h j Ad; 'II d tlln trullsver';e strain (transverse conthen I', =--- ,s Cd e ~ \ 'I d unrt , d!lT!elblonJ' ' .' \ L.}.p ,. 0 ' ; ' en shows that '::.'
The absolute va I LIe
0f
-I c~,
11--
\ i',' c:l1 hed Poisson's rut io. -
f
Shpar. Shear is called a def,~)~,~l~lttln~n ;1\:~li~ns;l;IC~~e ers of a body para llel to a [,' 'r p ,t' I'V ,hear tive to one another. In delO1md lOll 'J ' volume of the body re<1'---.. ------;1 mains unchanged. The line ,/ f I 5epment AA, (Fig. 13) Pf-:'- i"1'/----r/- - - - 7 ' 1 eq~a l to the disp lac:ement I of one plane re lat! ve to 1 1« another. is called the ab-
r~~~:
the
11
F
solute shear. For small angles of 5hear the angle ct~tan a=
_AA t
characterises
the
I
--'
/J""'------"
rig. 13. Ddormation by shear.
- AD . s!iearitw strain. felative deformatIOn an d'IS Ci:,II e d the . Hooke's law for deformatiOn by shear can be written tn the form: ,>
•
(l,36)
p=c.=GCL,
her'" the coefficient G is ca] leri the shear moduius.. , w CompreSSI - ., ·b·!·ty of matif'r \Vhell a body IS . slIlJJ.ccted I I . . I .~ V' . ,0 ressure in all directicHls its \,(,llili1c r!ccre;>c,-; 1)', '. as a p . It ·Iastic forces ari"l' ",11J([1 le"d to re"tu, l' ILl' body to resli e . volu!1le. T'de d';! its original AVio de!lned ;JS [he relative change in the vo1L:I!1c of a body
-V
produced
by
"
:i
42
Table 17
unit change in the stress (P) acting perpendicular to its surface. The reciprocal of the compressibility is called the modulus of volume elasticity or bulk modulus (K.). The change in the volume of a body Li V produced by an increase in pressure LiP can be computed by the formula: LiV= - V~LiP, (1,37) where V is the original volume. The potential energy of elast ic deformation is given by the
Epot=F:1
formula:
Moduli of Elasticity and Poisson's Ratios
Youn~'s
Alumininm draw!l
_
Maieri "I 1
Amilloplasls, laminated Bakeli le . Brass, bronze Brick . Ca"st ir~n. whi te . . . gray, fj nc-grai !led
n compression
8 2 -:3 22-50
20 SolO
21-25
0.74-3 up to 175 up to 140 60-100 ]G
gray.ordin:!f)-' 14-18 Cellon -1 Celluloid . . • . . . . . . 5-7 Concrete 0.5-3.5 Foam plastic in slabs . . O.OG Getinax (lanIinatcd iIlsuI,:1tioll) 15-17 15-18 Granite . . . . • . 0.3 12-2G Icc (O°C) . 0.1 0.1-0.2 Oak (13% moisture content) across grain 1.5 Oak (15% moisture contcnt) ;dong grain . 9 ..5 5 Phenoli c plasti c. i rnpregna ted 8-10 10-2G Pine (15% moisture content) across grain 0.5 Pine (1 5% moistl.·lr~ ·c~l1te·nt) <JIang grain . . . . . 8 4 Polyacrylate (organic 5 7 Polystyrene 4 10 Steel, structural. . 38-42 " silicon-chromi l1m-mangane~e 155 carbon. . 32-80 Steel for tracks 70-kO Teflon. 2 TextoHte TITK . 10 15-25 Vi nyl plasti c . . 4 8 ---'--~ ---------_. --------- - ' - - - - w
----
Shear modulus,
Poisson's ratio
kgmm~
wire'.
I
10 ..,00 Ii,
~)OO
4,20(J 2, GOO-2, 700
o .32-11.36
7.000
B"kelii,' . Brass, fo11('(1. for slii !1IO,IHIO buildj fig . :l, GOO-:J. 7110 ~l, I OOJ), noo cold-drawn . I', , ;,00 Cast i ron, wrought I I ,SOO-I G,OOO Cast iron, while, gray 1.7,1-1.03 Celluloid . G,200 I Ii, ,,00 Constalltan . S,400 Copper, casti Ill!, 4,'iOO 13,000 Copper, ('old-drawn 4,000 li,OOO Copper, rolled . . . 2,700 7, 100 Duralumin, rolled. Geti I1C!X (laminater! 1.000-1,7011 insuLition) I, SOIl-:'" 000 Gla', . ::\ G,1I00-8.1l00 4, (laO Granite 2S0- :,1111 1.0110 ] cc O,eOO 11,1100 lnvar . 71111 1,700 Lead 4 200 Li mcstone 12 (,00 ·1,700 J.,1angani n ;, , (,00 Marble . . 4,2110 11,500 Phosp hor bronze, ro1 Jed 131 535 plcxiglas . . .
Table 16 Breaking Stress of Various Materials (kg/mm 2 )
j
:l
I
TABLES
Brcakillg_s_ir_c_s_s
kgmm
Altltninium bronze, ('(lsii ng . Aluminium,rolled . .
(1,38)
intension
modulus,
Material
where F is the e laslic force, and Lil - the deformation,
_
43
TAB LES
CH. I. MECHANICS
, \~
Rubber. . . . O.S 8,100 Steel, alloyed 21. 000 8,1110 carbon 20,000-21,000 Steel casli nl!, 17,500 Textoiite . . GOO-I, 000 Vinyl plas\ic 300 Wood. 400-I,SOO ~~~olI~_._.__ ~_~~(~)_-__ ~_ ;:). :20o
0.36 II. :12-0.42 0.23-0.27 O. :J9 0.33
O. :31·11.34
0.2-0.3
0.12 I).
:)3
0.32-0.35
0.35 0.-17
0.2;5-0.30 0.24-0.28
I , _~
r
,rI
44
CH. I. MECHANICS 45
FUNDAM.ENTAL COXCEPTS AND L!\\VS
Table 18 Compressibility of Some Liquids at Difrerent Tempertltures
!
Su IJstance
I I
Aceti c aci d
Acetone
I I
Benzene Castor oi I
I I
Temperature
cc
25 14.2 0 0 Il 0 It; 2U 20
14.8
.
I I
I I
I
,
92.5
I
Compressibility, ~ >< 10 at m - 1
M.a leri al
8·37
1-10
47.2 112 102 95 86 80 73
Glyccri nc
14.8
1-10
22.1
Kerosene
I I Ii. I JS. I 52.2 72. I 94
1-15 1-15 1 15 1-15 I-I S 1-15
67.91 76.77 82.83 92. :n lOll. 16 108.8
+
I
20
I
Ni trobcllzenc
)
25
I
20.5 14.8
I
Olive oil Paraffi n (melti ng point, :35 0 C)
1
I
Sulfuric acid
I
Toluene
I
Water
I
Xylene
I
64 100 185 0 10 20 20 10 lOll
I I
I-Ill 192 1-10 1-10 20-1 110 20-40\J 20-400
,I I
1-16 1-5.25 1·2 2
1- 5.25 1 -5.
~5
Aluminium . . Brl ck masonrv Cast i r011, gr,.ly Concrete . Copper . Oak. across gr ai 11 ' Oak, along grai n . Pine, across grain Pine, along grain. Slet'!, alloyed, ior nl. C 1, i bui Idi ng . . Slee! (grade 3) Steel, carbon. for 111
'10 78.7 G7.5
~F)-2U6
2%-494
I
3.91
I
43.0
I
63.3 56.3
I I I I I
ill tension
81.4 III 82 59 47 411
I-50 50-100 IOIl-21l0 200·300 300-4(,;) 900·1, (11)0
Mercury
2 )
1 ;
9-36 100-500 500-I,OOIl I. Illlll-I , 51l1l I, 501l-2, lilill
I
20 20 20 20 20 100
Ethyl alcohol
Pressure range, atm
Table 19 Allowed stress of Vario,ls Materials (kgjmm
83 24 137 302.5 79 91.5 46 74 1:-;:2
I t
I
3·S 0.2 2. S-S 0.01-0.07 3-12 0.9·1.3 0.7·1 til'
lO~40
and marc \4
llC-
.
16-25 Up to 0.03
\
in cOIllpressi ell
3-S 0.06-0.25 12- \ 5 0.1-0.9 J·12 0.2·:3.5 I. :3-1.5 0.15-0.2 1-\ .2 10-10 and more 14 1 (j·25 O. 1l4-ll. 4
E. MECHANICS OF LIQUIDS AND GASES
fUNDAMENTAL CONCEPTS AND LAWS Liquids and gases, as distinct from soUd" of,'er no rr· sistance to a change in shape wh'ch does not entail a chanu' in vl'llume. To change the volume of a liquid or reduce the volume of a gas one must apply external forces. This propertv of fluids is called bulk elasticill!. Pressure (p) is defined as the perpend icular force acti ng on unit surface. 1. Sti,tics External pressure applied to a conflned gas or liquid is transmitted equally in all direction" (Pchcal's prinCiple). A column of liquid or gas in a uniform gravitationaJ'field exerts a pressure caused by the weight of the column. If the liquid or gas's assulTJed to be incompressible, then the pressure (1,39) where p is the density of the liq\\\d or gas,g is the acceleration of gravity, and h is the hei;;ht of the column. TIll;'
~-~~~-- --~----------46
CH. l. MECHANiCS
FUNDAM.ENTAL CONCEPTS AN"D LAWS
magnitude of the pressure is independent of the shape of the column and depends only on its height. The heights of columns of liqUids in communicating vessels are inversely proportional to their densities: hI
11-;
-f".-
(1,40)
fl
Equation (1,42) is called Bernoulli's equation. From this equation follows Torricclli's theorem:
y
I..
v= 2gH, (l,43) where v is the veloci ty of the liquid emerging from a small orifice in the vessel, and If i'i the height of the ~urface of the liqUid auove the orifice (Fig. 15).
A body immersed in [j fluid is buoyed up by a force equai to the weight of the Huid displaced (Archimedes' principle).
2. Dynamics When a fluid is in motion with a velocity much smallor than the velocity of sound in that fluid, it may be regarded as incompressible. The motion of fluids gives rise to forces of friction. If these forces ilre small they may be neglected, and the liquid or gas is called an zdeal flUid. Motion of an ideal fluid. A liquid or gas is said to flow at a steady rate when the velocity and the pressure remain constant at each point in the stream. In this case an equal volume of fluid flows through any cross-section of the pipe: SI V I=S2 V 2'
(1,41)
where SI and S2 are the areas of two different cross-sectiollii of the pipe, and VI and v 2 are the velocities of the fluid in these cross-sectious. When the cross-sectional area of the pipe changes, both the velocity and the pressure of the fluid change in such manner that .in any cross-section (for steady flow of an ideal fluid) the following condi tion is satisfied
p
or PI
+ pgh + f~2_=const r-v 2 ,rI.
(1,42)
'v 2 'h-tr2
+ pgf l l T =P2lPg l
where p is the pressure, the height of the given given level, and V is the section of the pipe (Fig.
}
!
2
-2'
f is the density of the fluid, h is cross-section of the pi pe above a velocity of the fluid in the given 14).
Fig. 14. Illustralion to formula (1.42).
Fig. 1 j
Flnw 01 Ii quid from a slllall orifice.
Motion of a viscous fluid. When one layer of a fluid moves over another layer forces of friction arise. . When a solid (e.g., a sphere) moves through a flUld, the adjacent layer of l!uid adheres. t? the surface of ~he s?lId a~d moves with it, while the remall1l11g layers of IIUld slide oY.er one another. The force acting on a solid mOVIng III a VIScous medium (lluid) is opposi te in direction to the v~locity and is called the resistance of the medwm. If no edd.les are formed in the wake of the moving body, then the resistance of the medium is proportional to the velocity v. In the particular case of a sphere of radius R the resistance of the medium is (1,44) where f] is the coefficient of internal friction, or . the .coeffi:cient of Viscosity. In the CGS system of 11mb v1scosriy IS measured in poises: 1 poise=1 gm/cm sec. Formula (1,44) is called Stokes' formula. .. When a small sphere fal1s through a visco.us thud Its velocity of uniform (steady) motion is determliled by the formula f - el 2R 2 v=g-l}--X--g, (1,45)
CH. 1. MECHA],ICS
TABLES
49
where p is il1l' deilsih of the s1'];ere, R is its radius, PI is the density of the lJuid, 11 is it. \iscosity, and g is the acceleration of free fall. The volume of fluid which nows in lInit time through a capillar:, tllhe of radii!' r: ilne! length I when tlJe pressure difference un tL' cd, of the lull' i,; PI .- P2 equals
c--r'"
1
~2
>;
Ij'
P2 )·
(PI -
(1,16)
The viscosity of fit.ids depends markedly on the temperature. t, °C
TABLES
Table 20
Vb,w;lty of V::riGlI, Liquids at 18° C
1-'~---I;)'----I~II~'d
U qUid
I
J',cct·I-·C-.~c':·----'- -II--.-ni-~,1.
Brami nc Cart'on Castoroi
. de.
!
I.I2 U. 31'-;]
1 ,:20:>
Chloroform .. Cylinder oil, d::rk
Cv1.illdcroi] 'IHio
l'l'[iiH'lj ' -./
Ethvl Ethyl
73
u.I)
. .
011
1
.
alcoilol ve oj I . . . . . • .
!I
IlpcntaIlc . . . . • . . . . 0.;) 7~) I prclPY,I. .::dcohol . . . . :24U I:SOY3 !~ean oj~ (30 e C)
,!:Tolut.'ne........
1.0.(II"Water.. I .
~~
,
"
Od')~ I
Aylene
I I ;-) 1.59
0.032 90
O.2~4
2. 3Y 40.(j
o.(iJi 1.05 0.04.7
----------~ __il.. Viscosity
_________
M
Of
Table 23 Viscosity of Glycerine, Castor Oil and Benzene at Diff'erent Temperatures (T] X 102 gjcm sec)
~
0
10
20
30
GO
sec Air (witllOut CO~) Ai1lJ110n~' a
Cdr LOll di oxi de . . Carhon Inonoxi de.
Chlorl ne Helium
.
.
1/'
III
Gas
i\'itrof2,en . . . jl\itrous oxi de. II Oxygen . . . .
I
200
0.76 0.65 0.5G 2.440 987 455 12. 100 3,950 I ,1~0 GOU
0.436 0.350 0.2GI O. III 129 4~ 180 59 13 0.22
-
Table 21
_
--._--------------1 • 7:2 Ii I-IYdrogen . • • o. ~J:l II A\etl,ane . . . I . 40 'I ,\'i tri c oxi de • I. b7 I .29 I. o~
100
--.-
II
';/ 10'1
Gas
70
Liquid
Benzene Castor oil Glyceri nc
Varicus Ga~:C5 at 0° C •
'I X 10' g!cm sec
:!'f)(';u
oil,
II j\ll, jlJ 11":
tl
I
'1.
10' gem ,ec
------)~-3q-3--
I
0:J:)71:
; \ C l ' l O l l C .:
AJli Ii ilC • 13cllzellC'.
I",
g elll
Table 24
;1 )( 10' gem sec
Viscosity of Liquid Helium
0.84 1.04 I .72 I. ()7 I. 38 1.92
4
3al(.4G
CH. I. MECHANICS
50
't.!",i
,
!
CHAPTER
~.
HEAT AND MOLECULAR. PHYSICS
~ ~;
~.
Ii
,
1 20
FUNDAMENTAL CONCEPTS AND LAWS
SO
Table 26 Viscosity of Some Meta!s in the Liquid state
- - - - - - - - - --.-----------
-------.----..
·------~f-----
I
t,
'I
;;1: 1
===--------1----i\'etal
'c
I
Yj
~----------
,1-11
I'
Lead
~~l
Mercury
20 50 100 200 300
I
1.(;;)
II
1.:2(",}
() . ~) D
I
103.7
1.
------, Tin
..
",
\
------'
0
GOO
~I
1.0;) 0.00 0.83 0.77 O.7~
\
_------------\. j~g
1 . (jq 1. 1 S
1.51 1 • ~O
500 liOO
Sodium
2 _II
- - - - - .--------_.-
~OO
-~--\
-----
,~crn SC~
---I-_-_-_-T:;~~
1:~)1 l,liU
Bismuth
X 1 0;;
a.GO 0.25 ().18 1.01 1.38 1.ILi
-'---------
The thermal state of a body is cbi.lfaderised by a quantity called the temperature. A change in the temperature of a body entails a change in almost all its properties (dimen· sions, density, elasticity, electrical conductivity, etc.). The temperature of a body is related to the average kinetic energy of thermal motion of its molecules. Temperature is expressed in d i!Terent temoerature 'cales. The most widely used is ~ R. ,. the centigrade (or Celsius) scale. The zero point of i the centigrade scale is the D ·t· '1'1"1 i - 1M £ilJ.'~':l?g /iom point at which water is -~--, II? - 8U ofwa/ei' P!l in equilibrium with ice; 192 7U I 8J the point 100° on the cen17l 70 tigrade scale is the boi lin~; 15! L 8J m point of water at standard I 50 I/! atmospheric pressure. In [ 'D 92 [ JJ addition to the centigrade 7l 2J scale the Kelvin (or abso5! IJ lute) scale is frequentlY He!li1Jf.poi1J! 32 o used; the zero of this scale alice -10 /2 is at-273.16° C, and -20 -8 the degrees are of the same -30 -28 -,0 size as on the centigrade scale. The R (;aUI1l11f and Fah;-enhcit scales are leo;s freq uently used. Fig. 16 shows the centiC'rade, Reaumur and 1G. Centi gr
4*
52
FUNDAMENTAL CONCEPTS AND LAWS
CH. II. HEAT AND MOLECULAR PHYSICS
t. Calorimetry When a body is heated its internal energy is increased. Thus, heat can he measured in units of work or energy. Historically, however, a special unit - the calorie - was adopted for measuring heat. The calorie is defined as the quantity of heat required to raise the temperature of one gram of water one degreefrom 19.5° C to 20.5° C. The kilocalorie (or kilogram calorie)=l,OOO cal=427 kgm= =0.24 joule. The quantity of heat requirec1 to raise the temperature of a hody of uni t mass frol11 to to t 1 =t o +;l..t is denoted by !J,.Q. The mean specific heat in the given temperature interval (I, - to) is defined as the ratio this ratio
r
cto=M ~lo
~t.
The limit of
;l..Q
M
is, by definition, the true speCifiC heat at the temperature to' The true specific heat depends on the temperature. However, in most cases this dependence is neglected and it is assumed that the true specific heat (or, simply, the speCific heat) can be defined as the quantity of heat required to raise the temperature of a body of unit mass from r C to (t It C at any temperature t. The quantity of heat Q absorbed by a body of mass m when its temperature is increased by ;l..t equals
+
Q=cmM,
(2,1)
where c is the specific heat. The specinc heat of a body also depends on the conditions under which it is heated. If the body is heated at constant pressure then cp is defined as the specific heat at constant pressare. If the volume of the body does not change upon heating, then ciJ is defined as the specifiC heat at constant volume. When a body is heated under constant pressure, a part of the heat imparted to it is spent on the work of expansion of the body; hence, cp>ciJ' The specific heats cp and c'o for a substance in the solid state difTer very little. For a given pressure there exists for every substance a definite temperature, called the melting point, at which the substance passes from the solid to the liquid state. Throughout this transition the temperature remains constant. Upon
53
melting a substance increases in volume (except for ice, cast iron and bismuth which decrease in volume). The quantity of heat required to melt a body is given by the formula Q~~'Am,
(2,2)
where m is the mass of the molten body, and /0 is the heat of fusi on. The heat of fasion is defined as the quantity of heat required to convert unit mass of a solid at the melting point into liquid at the same temperature. When a liquid crystallises (solidifies), heat is evolved. The heat of fusion is equal to the heat of crystallisation *. When a liqUid is contained in an open vessel \'aporisation - conversion from the liqUid to the gaseous statetakes place continually on its surface. During \'aporisation molecules escape from the surface of the liquid. Vaporisation which takes place not only on the smface, but within the liqUid as well, is called boiling. A liquid boils at a definite (for a given external pressure) temperature. This temperature is called the boiling point. It remains constant throughout the process of hoi ling. 130i ling requires the expenditure of a quantity of heat:
Q=rrn,
(2,':) where m is the mass of evaporated liquid and r is the heat of vaporisation. The heat of vaporisation is defined as the quantity of heat reqUired to convert unit mass of a liquid at the boiling point into vapour at the same temperature. When a vapour or gas is condensed (i.e., converted from the gaoeous to the liquid state) heat is evolved. The heat of vaporisation is equal to the heat of condensation. The boiling point and the melting point depend on the external pressure. The evaporation of a liquid from an open vessel can proceed until all of the liquid is converted into vapour. In a closed vessel evaporation proceeds unlil a state of eqUilibrium between the mass of the liquid and thai of the vapour is reached. At this slage evaporation and condensation compensate each other. Such a slale of equilibrium is called * This refers to crystalline and polycrysial!ine bodi eg. A crystalline body is onc whose properties are difk'l"l'llt in different dlrectiuns.
A body composed of llumerous cryslal:> is called poil/crvstallill••
54
ClI. II. HEAT AND MOLECULAR PHYSICS
FUNDAMENTAL CONCEPTS AND LAWS
dynamic. A vapour which is in dynamic equilibrium with its liquid is called a saturalcd vapour. The pressure and
(It) is determined. by its length at 0° C (In)' the temperature V) and the coefficient 01 linear expanSlOn (a):
density of a saturated vapour are determined by the temperature. Boiling occurs at the temperature at which the pressure of the saturated vapour is equal to the external pressure. The pressure and density of a saturated vapour increase, while the density of the liquid decreases with increasing temperature. When a liquid is heated in a closed vessel the result wil1 depend on the amount of liquid. If the quantity of liquid is great, lhen upon expansion it will eventuiJ lly occupy the entire volume of the vessel. If the quantity of liquid is sm3l), then at a certain temperature it will evaporate completely. For ~ certain initial quantity of liquid in th vessel the liquid and its .MoCI1! saturated vapour will remain "-;(g r----r--.---r--~ in eO,uilibriul1l as the temper-;; 'SCO'07 -_ -I ;],m,: inc;-eases, up to a cer'"lin point, at which their
'~~''
I
J-_.__ -.-fJ~l~f~_ ~d'
densities become equal and the meniscus dividing them :::,,;. ~JO'h---+----i-_---~I' -.disappears. This state is ~ called the critical state, and ~ 200 ~~Ithe values of the density, ·iii 100 __' . pressure and temperature cor
4PO
2. Thermal Expansion of Solids and Liquids A change
in the temper;;ture of solids and liquids is l)y a c11;ln~;C' in 1hell' liIl(~Jr dinlC'nsion~ and vvlUluc:. TIll: lengtil ui a solid body at J temperature t) C
ac(,c1l11p~\J1ie,l
55
+
It = IJ (l at). (2,4) The coefficient of linear expansion is defined as the mean (for the temperature interval from ()C to I'C) Increase 111 unit length of a body lor une deg'ce 1'1',12 In temperature
X I ( a =~ J
It -/ ",) .
Similarly, for the volume of a body
+
Vt = "" (1 ~t), (2,5) where ~ is the coefficient of VOlellTle expansion. The coefficient of vull/flU' expunsion is deiined as the mean (for a given temperature interval) increase in unit volume of Vt - V,,) . a body for om: degree rise In temperature p = VI X --1-
.,
. (R
o
For an isotropic solid (a uody whose properties are the same in every direction) ~=3a. The coefficients of volume and linear expansion are expressed in 1;' degree. The follOWing formulas are more exact:
!'11 == 10 (at
+ vI
2
),
It = lu
(l.~
a/
+ ht").
(2,6)
Thus, the coefficient of linear expansion varies with the temperature range in which the boely is heated. For example, for iron It=lu (l+I17XIO- 7 t +4.7><10- 9 t 2 ), and the coefficient of linear expansion of iron upon heat1l1g from O°C to 75 c C equals 1.2lXlO- o Ijdegree, while for the temperature range 0:C-750 c C it equals 1.52XIO-· I!dewee. When a body is heated its denSity changes. The denSity of a body at a temperature I is gi yen by the formula Q
Pt =, T~-=-Pt . where Po is the density of the body at O"C, and coeiflcient of volume expansion.
(2,7) ~ is the
3. Transfer of Heat Heat can be transmi \ted by convection, conduction and ralhation (see therma I radiation). Convect iotl. In J!u ids tem pera t lire d i;Terence, are evened (l'll mainly by collwclion, 11) the !low of the lluid from a
56
CH. II. HEAT AND, MOLECULAR PHYSICS
fUNDAMENTAL CONCEPTS AND LAWS·
warmer to a colder region. Convection does not take place in so lids. Conduction. Conduction is the transfer of heat brought about by the random motions of atoms or molecules. The quantity of heat transferred through a layer of substance of thickness I and cross-sectional area S having a temperature difference T 2 - T I on its planes in a time t is given by
Q= A • T-t ----T-I S t, l
(2,8)
where A is the thermal conductivitv. The thermal conductil'ity is defined as the quantity of heat transferred in unit time through a laver of unit thickness and unit cross-sectional area when the ·temperature difIerence between the two surfaces of the layer is 10 • The thermal conductivity is usually expressed in kilocal cal - - - - - - or ------------. In the first case the quanm hour degree cm sec degree ' tity of heat transferred is expressed in ki loca lories when the thickness of the layer is expressed in m, the cross-sectional area in square meters and the time in hours. 4. Surface Tension of Liquids The molecules in the surface of a liquid experience forces of attraction due to the remaining molecules, which tend to pull them into the liquid. The :iurface layer of molecules is in a state resembling that of an elastic membrane under tension which tends to contract. Every section of the surface experiences the pull of all the surrounding sections which keep it in a state of tension. These forces are directEd along the surface layer and are called forces of surface tension. The force of surface tension 'is gi ven by the formula
F=al, (2,9) where I is the perimeter of the sllfface layer of liquid and a is the coefficient of surface tension. The coefficient of surface tension (or, simply, the surface tension) is defined as the force acting on un! t length of a rectilinear boundary of [he surface layer of a liquid. The smface tension decreases wi th i ncreaoing tempera ture and vamshes at the cnt:cal temperature.
5. Gas Laws The behaviour of most substances in the gaseous state under Qrdinary conditions is described _by the equation
pu
=c
m RT.
(2,10)
fl
This equation is ca lled the equation of slate of an ideal gas or the general gas law (Clapryron-Mefldeleyev' s equation). Here p is the pressure of the gas, v -- the volume occupied by m grams of the gas, fl - a mole (a mole or gram molecular weight of any substance is an amount of that substance whose mass, expressed in grams, is numerically equal to the molecular weight), R - the universal gas constant, T - the temperature on the Kelvin scale. This equation is valid (in the first approximation) for all sllbstances in the gaseous state, if the density is much less thaI. t]e density of the same substance in the liqUid state, The number of molecules cO>ltained in Olle mole is the same for all substances and is eJ11ed Avogadro's Humber (0:); N =6.02 X 10 28 mole-I. , From equation (2,10) we dec "lee Gay-Lussac's !::lw, Charles' law and Boyle's law. For constant p and m (since R=const and fl is constant for the given ~ubstance) .. T1 vl=v oT •
° tentDerature of the gas where V il and To are the volume and at O°c. Whence follows Gay-Lussac's law (t;,n equation of an isobaric process): v = v (; (I \ Fo~
-too --!273
t) .
constant v and m we obtain Charles'
(2,1 1a) law (isochoric
proces~):
P=Po For constant T and law:
III
(I +2h I) .
(2,llb)
(i:;otherma 1 process) we obtain Boyle's (2, lIe)
The quantity 1/273.16 degree- * is called the coeffiCient of voluIne expansion at eonstalit pressure Of the coeffiCient of pressure I
• lj273.1G=3.t>6I
X 10-'.
58
FUNDAMENTAL CONCEPTS AND LAWS
CH. H. HEAT AND MOLECULAR PHY',,!CS
is the number of molecules, and VI is the velocity of the i~th molecu Ie. The pressure of a mixture of ideal gases is equal to lhe sum of the partial pressures of the component gases. The partial pressure is drfinec as the pressure which P9.clJ ot the gases would exert j.f it alone occupied the whole volume:
lihange at constant volume of a~ ideal gas. For real gases at pressures close to atmosphenc or greater the respective coefficients differ somewhat from this value.' The .demity of a gas pmay bE' computed from equation (2,10) If the pressure p, the ten pera lure T and the mo lecdar weIght of the gas are known:
p=
m IJ.p v== RT'
(2,12)
. When a gas expands isothermally (at constant temperature) It performs work agall1st the external pressure. This work is performed mainly at the expense of the heat absorbed from the surrounding medium. The temperature of the gas and the surrounding medium remain constant. When the gas is compressed it releases heat which ~oes off into the surrounding 1J1uhum. When the volume of a gi ;,en mass of gas changes without heat entering or leaving the system (adiabatic process) the relatIOn between the p~essure ,mu the volume is express~d by the equatIOn of the aciJabat: pVl const, (2,13) w here
P = Pl+P2+'"
v
6. Fundamentals ')f the Kinetic Theory of Gases
mass of a molecule, k =
~
is ca Led BolizlIIann's constant,
is the temperature on the Kelvin scale, and c is the root mean square velocity of the molecules. The root mean square velocity of the molecules is defined as 1
c=v/- v!+v~~~;+.~_±_u;,
(2,15)
Fig. 18. Distribution of velocities of nitrog'cn molecules at tern· peratures 20°C and 500°C. vp11l0St probable velucity at gIven temperature, C root mean square veloel ly.
The molecules of a g~;s move wi th different veloci ties. Fig. I1n 18 "ives t!1C dependence of the fraction of molecules - n , -', t;, with velocities between and on the velocity. The velocity corresponding to the maximum of the curve in Fig. 19 is called the most probable velocity. The average velocity of the molecules is defined by the relation
cp
Cv
or 'l' p = nkT, (2,141J) where n is the number of molecules in unit volume, m is the
(2,16)
wh,e re PI' P2' ... , Pn are the p...:.. tial pressures. The average kitletic energy of translation3l motion of the molecules uepends only on the temperature of the gas: 3 E =2 kT. (2,17)
y=--~.
From the molecular point of view a gas consists of a huge number of freely moving particles (molecules or atoms). These partlcles are jr constant mot on with different velocities which change ,,'hen the particlei,.~lide The pres~ure of a gas IS due to th~ impact of individual molecules on the walls of the container. It is equal to 1 , p =:3 nmc~, (2,14a)
+ Pn'
59
v av
~
T \
v+ L\v,
== + + v.n-+ ... + v n VI
V2
•
(2,18)
The average velocity is greater than the most probable vdocity and [f'SS than the root mean square velocity. Some molecules, whose velocities are greater than the escape velocity, can escape from the upper layers of the atmosphere into interplanetary space. The atmosphere is a mixture of gases held by the field of gravi ty of the planet which it surrounds. The pressure of the atmosphere decreases wi th increasing distance (h) from the surface of the planet. If it is assumed th3l the temjJerature of the atmosphere is independent of !lIe height, thcn
(:2,19)
60
CH. II. HEAT AND MOLECULAR PHYSICS:
TABLES
where /1. is the average molecular weight of the mixfure of gases comprising the atmosphere, g - the acceleration of free fall near the surface of the planet, R - the universal gas constant, T - the absolute temperature, p" - the pressure of the atmosphere at the surface of the planet, e - the base of the natural system of logarithms (e ~ 2.72). In the case of the earth this formula can be written in the form
h=8,OOO log 0!.. , p where h is the height in metres, T=c273°K.
(2,19a)
In many countries, including the U.S.S.R., scientific data are often corrected for a standard atmospheric pressure, which is taken equal to the pressure at sea level at 15°C when the mercury barometer registers 760 mm and the temperature f2Jls 0 by 6.5 with every 1,000 m increase in elevation. Table 51 gives the relation Letween the height, pressure, density and temperature of a stand:lfd atrnosplwre. The air about us always contains a certain amount of water vapour. The mass of water vapour contained in I cubic meter of nir is called the absolute humidity. The absolute humidity can be measured by the partial pressure of the water vapour•. As the absolute humidity increases, the water vapour approaches the state of saturation. The maximum absolute humidity * at a given temperature is defined as the mass of saturated water vapour contained in I cubic metre of air .. The relative humidity i:; defined as the ra tio of the absolute humidity to the maximum absolute humidity at the 'i;: given temperature, eXfJrb'ied in per cent. The thermal conductivity of a gas (I,) is calculated by the formu la I "=-3 tV JV Cv l, (2,20) where p is the demi ty of the gas v av - the average velocity of the gas molecules, C v - the speciJic heat at constant volume, I - the mean free path. The mean free path is defined as the average path which a molecule travels lwtween successive collisions with other molecules. The mean free path in a gas is given by the formula liT l=c=--- , (2,21) V 2 :Jto 2 p where (f is the di2!1lelcr of a molecule of the gas. ,. UllU":f certain c011ditiulL::i ::~llpcrsatLlrJ.tio1l01 lilt.:: vapour can set in.
TABLES
Table 27 Specific Heat, Heat of Fusion, Melting and Boiling Points
Substance
Acctone Aluminium Benzene Brass Carbon di sulfi de . Cast iron Copper Ethyl alcohOl Ethyl ether FluoplasU c·4 Glyceri ne Gold Ice (water) Iron Lead Mercury Methyl alcohol Naphthalene Nickel Propyl alcohol Silver Steel Tin Toluene Vinyl plasti c Wood: oak, G-8 % moisture content by \vei ght pine. 8 0 / 0 moisture content by weight Wood's alloy
Spccific hcat at 20°C. cal;g degree
Melli ng point, °C
0.52 0.21 0.407 0.0917 0.24 0.12 0.094 0.58 0.56 0.25-0.22 0.58 0.032 0.50 0.119 0.03 0.033 0.6 0.29 0.11 0.57 0.056 O. \ 1 0.055 0.414 0.271-0.286
---D,j.3 ();)8.7
5.5 DOO -112 I, I 00-1 ,200 1,083 -114 -116.3 -20 1.063
o
Hcat of fusion, cal/g
76.8 30.4
°C 06.7 :2,000 00.2 4 ii. 2
23-33 11 20 27 42 15.D 7D.7 23- :33 5. :3ti 2.8 24
1,530 327 -38.9 -97 80 1,452 -127 D60.5 1,300-1,400 231.9 -95.1
58.3-73 20.7 21 49 14 17.2
65.5
8.4
0.57 0.65 0.04
Boil· ing point.
2, :100 7S.3 34.6 ~90 ~.
(jOO IOU 3,000
35G.7 Ii\. 7 2. 18 Of)
2, 100
I 10.7
CAJIT TI:U"'" ..
TABLES CH. II. HEAT AND MOLECULAR PHYSICS
62
Tuble SO Table 28 Chan~e
Relat; vo change in volume
Substai:i!:e
l\1~!ting
in Volume upon
I Substance
G.G
Antimony 13i sl1luth . Ca.:-Irnium .
-0.94 -3.32 4.74 2.6 5.19 -B.3 2.5 3.6
Ccsi LIm
•.
Gold Ice (water) Indium Lead
Specific Heat
*
Relalive change j n volume, LlV
LlV
V
If °/0 Aluminium
Specific Heat ·c!' of Water (in caljg degree) at Dilferenl tOC.
I Li lhiul11
um · iVlagllcsi Mercury . . Poiassi I Silver . lIni
Sodium Tin
2:6
•.
IZinc . .
Iel' ' TeIllPera-\--·-i.l- Tem;JPra\ iure 1
.
1
tUl'C
__ ~_-~_-'1 1.0 I ()-1 I . OIJ Ii:' I . ()() :-,:1 1.()()1:1
0° 5° 10° !
1. (lUi) \.l
:3;) ? IJO
i !,'.
f'p
I
l'p
.
._
70'
I .00 1-1
7 .J ROo '·
I.
~i()
1.1111111 I.IJIJIJ"
1 () () 0
O. '1 CIS·l QB..J-
(). ~.1
::~':
Ii
I
.__._._.. il . ..
U. q ~i
o. D:)Bll II
3()O
•
...
1
%
1.5 4.2 :J.6 2.41 4.99 () 5
.
Telllperature
~I () 0
I. I. no I I.
(j(I;)G
----------- --- -------
6.9
Tuol.: 31
Table 29 of Various Solids (in caljg degree) at D if!'erent t"e
Specific Heat c, of Unuid Ethyl Alcohol (in eal'g degree) at Difl\rent TctTq:eratures and Pressures
a) True Substance
Copper . . SI Ii ca glass Silver . . .
0 \ -2IW!-1 00 \
0.040 0.013 0.0375
0°
11000 12000 13000 1 5000
0.082 0.0910.094 0.09R 0.1010.107 0.1160.1670.199 0.2440.266 0.052 0.0560.0570.060 0.063
b) Average Substance
1-1000-00 100-1000
~ 0°_200°
0°-300°
o .09G
0.097 0.210 0.057
-------Copper . . Silica glass Silver . . .
:I .\
Temperature,
~OC
pressure, 0.. 08.7 0.113 0.054
0.093 0.183
O.5G
kt;/cm~
------• The values of the specific heat, are expressed in 20-degree calories (the specific heat of water at 20°C is taken c:lual to unity).
O. 33 (). 42 SO. 47 Ii O. ,,2;) (). 57 GO. G21i O. G7 8 0.:J7U 1J.-125 0.472 0.,,1'1 0.5Gb O.Gl7 0.1i6G
10 GO
',,---"
80
100
120
1-10
IGO
I RO
200
'-......._ I
10 60
0.7310.7810./;400.R(15 O. 71G O. 7G7 0.820 0.874 0.9JO 0.999 1
1.09
TABLES
Table 35
Table 32
Heat of Vaporisation at Boiling Point Gnd Standard Atmospheric Pressure
Specific Heat of Some Gases at t atm (in cal/g degree)
---------,-----
:':
"~~
Waler
Carhon dioxide
Air
Oxygen
E
OJ
ICplC V
c 1'
O 0.21S5 100 0.223 200 0.230 300 0.2376 (j00 0.2553
1.397 1.385 1.37 1.353 1.321
cp
IcT/c o
cl'
1.400 1.397 1.390 1.37 S 1.345
0.240 0.241 0.24;) 0.250 0.266
e/)
II
1.30 1.2GO 1.235 1.217 1. ISS
IC[J!CI:
o
I
50
II
.
Benzene
!cj,/cv
cp
..
.
- 0.320 1. 16 0.502 1.28 0.403 1.12 0.472 1.30 0.4S0 1.10 0.4S1 1.2!l 0.554 I. OS 0.527 1.26 0.756 1.06
c 1J , cal'g degree . Temperature,
°C
vapo~-~~rf---;:-CI11P:'r::turc~I---~~~'apori~
°C
all, cal/'g
0C
I
00
I
150
I
2 00
I 250 I 2 SO
-50 ~40
30
50
75
I
100
200
I
250
I
300
o
SCi.:)
20
G2.':}
37.0 1S. 0
;J!.!
;)11
U.O
Table 37
-------------- - - - - 125
1
I
SII.6 7U.5 7'2 . .5
Equilibrium Densities o! Liquid and VaroLJr. Ethyl Alcohol Pressure, aim
I
Dcn~itv
DC-I~';i
~j~ur,.t-
-::-/ tyof liquid, g,cm:1 cd vapour,
".
g,cm 3
---~--'~--
600
cpo cal!g degree . . . \ 0.267910. 2G221 O. 262S[ 0.2G56 1°.2889
I
-J
1.37510.796010.40431 0.32410.291[°.2748
I
G
._--
Temperature, 0C
150
aL-oilol
Heat of sati on, cal g)!
Temperature,
Specific Heat cp of Carbon Dioxide at 65 kg/cm 2
°C
!)
,:llcohoJ
Tu!Jle 36
Table 34
25
lOS 117. ()
50
Heat of Vaporisation of Carbon Dioxide at Dill.'erent Temperatures
-30 -10
Temperature,
125 !l4 55-7 :> 85 202
Benzine, aviat ion g-rac!c Carbon di sulfi de Ethyl alcohol Ethyl ether . . Kerosene Liquid helium
Table 33
°C
I
Heat oi vapori sa-. lioll, cal g
--------~----
Specific Heat c p of Air at 20 kg/cm 2 Temperature.
I
SUbstance
Acetone
Icplc"
0.1946 0.2182 0.2371 0.2524 0.2847
._-----
Substance
Ethyl alcohol
vapour
'"0 p.
E-
G5
CH. II. HEAT AND MOLECULAR PHYSICS
64
_.
78.3 90 140 170
1.00 1.562 7.486 15.61
O.73G;-, 0.7151 iJ.U(;;ll
O.OOIGS OiJ0250 0011,,2 0.0'21\U
(J.ti\!;;; O.J7o::! O.o5t;K
190
2:J.~H
200 210
'2~J.2 ~)5.31
O.S:2~jl
220
42.38 50.S:)
D.
(l.U:)!)? 0.0;')0-3 O.()(jJO 0.0--;,"1
lJ.:'
0.11;5;)
f)Sl.q~
().:L<";·_~:·J
03.1
U.~7J;-)
230 240 :!4:).1 _._-_.
__._-'---------------,._----....
5 JaK.46
-_._~
... __.. .-.--..
_ .•.
n.lil') 0.27;)6 _-_._~~----~--
TABLES
ell. II. HEAT Al\D MOLECULAR PHYSICS
66
67
Table 38 Equilibrium Densities of Liquid and Vapour. Water T.mperature, -\- p - - - ' , \ 0C ressurc ann 1
\
----
o
50 100 150 200 250 300 330 350 360 370 374.15
Denslly 01 saturat· cd vapour, g,'cm 3
DCllsl ly of liquid. g,cm 3
0.00000484 0.0000k31 0.0005% 0.00155 0.00787 0.01 ~19 0.0463 0.0771 O. I 135
1.000
0.00613 O. 1 ~ (i 1.0:,3 4. S,d 15.857 40.56 S7. 6 I 131. IS 168.63 190 214. (iR 225.G5
O.gQO O. 9li 3
0.91
O. 0.799 0.714 0.641 O.5H
O. I H2
O.5~8
0.20:, 0.307
0.4 c, 0.307'
0.02 o. I 0.2 0.4
17.2 4 5 .1 5\1.7 75.4
(l.G
::(,~~J40.2
:~
g:~~:~
0.2778 0.2418 0.2109 0.19S0 O.IGtJ:J 0.11:)·1 O.12(;J
:~U
200.4 206.2 211.1 -'J:J?- ,S' ..!.._ _ 2.4__9,_._2___
:,0
__4_0
5:,9.7 535.4 ;)29.1 526.9 517.7 510.·1 5tH. I 498.7 493.7
0.9% 0.902 O.GI7 O.HOS
l1B:g
16 IS 20
,·dS.6 544.1 542.0
1.,12
142.9 151.1 158.1 161.2 169.6 17,1.5 179.0
io
554.6
2.127 1.905
tJ.:'
ti 7
Critical Parameters
~.7~5
93.0 90.2 \19.1 100 105 II'
8
5S6 .9 570.4 563.7
~:271
83.45
O.R 0.9 I 1.0333 1.2:1 I.S 2 3 4
5
Table 39
68.3 11. 96
g::!W~
(1.0ti
~~
_
1~g·.G lSI I ~73:8
H;].2 4Gl.2 .5 4' .:J•
I
._l
Substance
Table 41 Coefficients of Volume Expansion of Liquids at about 18'C
---_ ••.. _ - - Acetic acl d Acelone . . Benzene . Carbon dioxide Ethyl alcohol. He(iull1 . Hydro[,ell . Methane Methyl alcohol Naohthakllc . Ni trog'en . Oxygen . Propyl alcohol Toluene . . . . Water
~~
32 1.6 235 2S8.6 31. I 243.1 -267.9 -239.9
-o:Z.E> 240 468.2 -147.1 -11S.8 263.7 320.6 374.15
57.2 47 47.7 73 63. I 2.26 12. S 45.8 78.7 39.2 33.5 49.7 49.95 41 6 222'
0.351 0."68 0.304 0.460 0.276 0.069 0.031 0.162 0.272 0.311 0.430 0.273 0.292 0.307
------ ---------_._---_._---
---~--10' Substance Acetone. • • • .
~~l~~i~~~e .
~
: : : CJ.rLon disul[id,,-' Chloroform. . . Ethyl alcohol Ethyl ether. Formic acid
~1:'~~'~iA~: : :
Mercury
,"<
SUl"lst;lI1Ce
1-1.:J
I',\\ct hy! alcohol
11. U 12.cl 11.0 If ') ).,
1"llprOllV1 T I
1~ ~ ~
fl
10'
I j degree
1 I .9
i~~~::~lL~~l~l\d..
1~.' ~
:l.!cO!l'OI· : :
J
-
9.g 10.8 D.40
TOLll'lle...... j urpcntine .O . . . I\V(ltcr at •. S -.II..)()
0.53
liU: : : 0::~::;ii: lU.O 4())_t;()'"l
4.58
,,(P-t!O'
5.S7
II
________
I.S1 -----_.
I
1
~:g~
. _ - - - - - - -....' - - - - -
5::;
68
CH. II. HEAT AND NlOLECULAI( PHYSICS
Table 42 Coefficients of Linear Expansion a of Solids at about 20°C SllrfilCC
Substance
Aluminium . . Bismutil
22.~
Bruss . . . . .
1 t". U
'i
17.5
F':i
.:>. ;)
. Ie)
7.!J
\ GIH_T:_·tl~
CemC!i!
1 ~. 17.
Constantan Copper Di~:lllOlld .
n (I
1".7 iI.'11 2:.!.C
D:Jralumin
il
II
I:
Glass, J))'Tex . . Gold . . • . • .
:3 11.5 B.3
5i1.7 u.S
13.4 k.9
8.7 .
i'l;,ii'ill'>!,;"idil";; :: il,,)
~)
11.0 ~
1 in
iIil \i II II Ii
(,
0.5 I 1 . ~)
:i
18.4
oOe)
~~.3 ~:J. 1
Ii
I'll
Granl tc . . . . . lec (i rom-10DC to IriditllIl
T:zble 14 Tcns!on of Waler a'1d Ethvl Alcohol at Diilerent Temperatures (in dynes,cm)
I (). 4 II. !J
j
II M,,(W";JliIl
ELlonite .. German silvl~r Glass, ordi nary
B.5
69
10.2
l:l ,1
13ri ck masonry
Bronze Carbon
TABLES
1.4 4.3
7U ~;r ~Jin)
SU-()O
gr~dn)
:!-G 30.0
Zi J1C
Table 45 Surface Tension of Metals in the Liquid state Table 43 Tcn~;jon
Sur'face
of Liquids at 20 c C
1--;:.------------1-'-
.-.-~~~~.~.
SU
SU\;s~::llce
I I c!YllCS,cm
II 'li,1
SL1~)staIlcC'
Surf;lce
I d;ll1C's,;crn kilsion.
--T--~--i;-----------·--~--
Acetic acid Acetone. . Anili lle . • Benzene . Butvric ;:cid C,\stOf oil. .
:
1)7" l). 7
.
12.lJ
'li\lc'-]lvlcdoiJol II lofJ{.'tlZellC oil . . ~ (I () II . 27 .! II 1(I,S-'C) I ,or \ 1
I
.13b
~~~~,~~c~~~~ I~L~ :o~t;)::_~'~ _ _:
I
Ivletal
~J
..._..~17~: ~
cc
'-~"-'---
Bismuth ________ 1 Lead
Joo----·I 400 ~()O
"m
11
Mercury
SodhI'"
~
~()O
.. ~';7(;'·'---:170 3li3
46~
454 436
300 :354
10.5 394
100 250
206.4 199.5
:300 Tin
I
1---J;'o---I~l':I)-= 20
(lSOC)
1Cj:.~iotl,
l:\'I"')
---;:~~;~_·-I~-~J~---I-----S;-o---
22.0 4 '1
Surf;!CC'
T,_'mper:ltuf,-',
400 500
71
TABLES CH. II. HEAT AND MOLECULAR PHYSICS
70
_________~T_h_ermal Conduct iV_i~ti_e_s, !V\Olsttlre contt'nl.
Subsi;J 11('C'
(1,'0
()f
wciL~ht
Table 47 Table 46 _
Thermal conduetivit y. keal.'m hr degree
Coefficients of Pressure Change at Constant Volume for Various Gases
"g
~O ;,U
Gas
E E
h~
:
"'"
2
b.O
2
1'•
0
3.GGO
3.6G2
3.G74
tn
"
8~,
..-:c::
"'"
2 .:::-
'"
o~s
"'"
tJJ
>-.
x
Metals
180 7:J.5 54
Aluminium Brass . . Cast iron Copper • Gold •. Iron Mercury Silver . . Steel
Coef !leien! of Eh=~;~uerX 10'
2G9 G4 25 3GO 39
3.802
3.72G
3.G74
Table 48 Thermal Conductivities of Liqnids at Various Temperatures (in kcalm hr degree)
InS11lafillg iHa1erials Ail~
Asbestos c"rdbocrd Asbestos felt . Asbestos parer Foam concrete Foam g1a.ss . . Foam resin . . Furnace slag . l\\ipor (microror()l1~ fuLLer) Pressboard (mack of rcc'u:s) Woo.! felt .
dry
O. 135 0.045·0.08 0.152-0.115 0.103-0.275 O. ()(j3-0. 092 11.1137-0.05 0.211-0.32 0.033 0.09 0.04
Various other materiels Bakelite varnish . . Brick mD~ollr)1 . • • Cardboard . ClaY .
<-liT "dry
15-20 8 8
Concrete, rcinio:--rcc1 Concrete with crushed rock Corkboard Fluoplastic-3 . Fluoplastic-4 . Glass,ordinarv Granite Gravel lee Leather . Oak. across grnin Oak. a long grain . Paper. ordinary . pine. across grain Pine. along gr;'in Plaster . . . Slag concrete. Vinyl ploslie .
3.G74
~)3;)
o
air dry air drv (,-8 •
~
(j·8 air dry 8 8 G-8 13
\
0.25 0.58-0.70 0.12-0.30 0_ G-O. 8 1.33 1. I 0.036-0.046 0.05 0.2 0.G4 1.89 0.31 1. D 0.12-0. 14 O. 17-11.18 O. :J-O. 37 0.12 0.12-0.14 0.30·0.35 0.G8 O. GO 0.108
= - n_n~; :::--r: !h I ~ f-
'''b'''''''' -
t::,:r::;.
Castor oi I . . Ethyl alcohol G Iyecri ne Metbyl alcohol Toluene. VaselIne oil \V a ter • . . .
T-----,~~T;;,":":,~;" "T---,,,,, O. 1 fi~
11.18·\ 11.122 0.108
O. 152 II .24:3 11.178 0.111 11.105
O. 474
O.
5~) 7
0.248 (). 102 0.102 0.587
Table 49 Thermal Conductivities of Some Gases at Standard Atmospheric Pressure
---------------; Substance
---------
Tcmperature, \ Thermal conrl"."cliVit y • 'c i. X 10' kcalm hr degree
\
~~-.--.---'---'~:\---~0-1----'------2-2-1---Argon. . . . . Carbon dioxide Helium Hydrogen Methane Nitrogen Oxygen.
., :)() 4.3
1"0 1;) 20
1 (j 1 1:,9 I , :,·1 0 1,508 2 (j4 ~ 1G 225
72
Cli. II. HEAT A1\D MOLECULAR PHYSICS TABLES
Table 50 Dependence of the Lifetime of the Planetary Atmospheres on the Escape V c10city Age of eiJrih Jxl0 9 -4xIO" years
----I~--------
.~ ;;~~~:eLifetime (ycars)
__I
uc
4.5
I
73
Table .;3 Heats of Ccrnhustion of Some Filels The amOUl1t of ileat evolved unit volume) of a fL:.cl is called
:he
[wat
uf unit Jn~L;S (or
---~-------,------
5
Fuel
~_I-~~-:--I--2-5-X-.-l0-'So!id
Table M
Standard Atmosphere Height. m
o
I
1,000 2,11011
1 0.CJ1I7 O.S22 0.742
lI.kR7
o . 7 r: 4
;J,IIIIII
(J •
Ll,()(J()
C\;'2
1I.1;llk ().5:-;;)
fJ,(JI)O (i,O(IO 7.CIIII
(). (j(>D
O. liO I
(). ,1 Cl;) O. ,1 II;)
~;, (lU\)
().5:JB
(). 4 BI O. '12:, (J. :381 0.337
n. ::;S 1
9,111111 10,0011
O.:lO:3
0.2111
15 8.S 2 -4.5 -11
-17.5 -24 -30.5 -37 -43 -50
Table 52
DiJmders of Molecules
~ubstanre-----I
OJ!); 10' em
II
Substance
Argon . Carbon dioxide. rnol~(jxi de ]-Jplillnl
.•.
Hydro:{l'i1 . .
I! I<:ryplon I J\\c'rcury Xi trogon I.iIOxygen . II:\cnon
Note. Tbe diameters of the reslllis of rJJPasuremcllts
7,2-10 k, alkg 7. 100
Coal (grade Al .
4,900
Dynamite (75%)
1,290
Gunpowder
720-750
Peat (i n IUl1J[s)
:l.560
Shales (Eslhon,an)
2,300
Wood • • • • . . . Uijuid Benzi ne
3. 14 3. 0 3.2 2.9 4.0
.
mokcules have been comnuted from
llic Viscosity of g
.
10. GOO
Black oil
9.4110
Etbyl alcohol
6,470
K.erosene
10,300
Ligroin .
10,500
__ .~~
I)
C8.rLOll
I D~l~k~~el~s~i
Antbraci te (grade An) Cbarcoal . • . . • . .
Cas
Carbon monoxide
3,100
Coke oven gas
3, bIl0·4, 500
Hydrogen
2.5kO
Illuminating gas
4,200-5,000
Natural gas
S.5IJO
---------------
74
CH. II. HEAT A"t\D MOLECULAR PHYSICS
CIlAPTERlII
o
MECHANICAL OSCILLATIONS AND WAVE MonON
2 4 Ii ~
7 14 20 2,5 30 34 37
10 12
14 IG I ~ 20 22 2·1
4k
2G :HJ 34 37 40 42
50
44
40 43 45
,\',,{c. The r"LII meia (\\'ct :lod drY i"lll'ters. wi (II" ;1 a pic\'(' fro Tn the TTl I""" 1'l',1 bulb lI",'Clllorn"ter', dry
4 I I 17 22
of
;l
FUNDAMENTAL CONCEPTS AN D LA ''liS 9 15
20 24
28 31
34 37 39
pSl/chro·
two ljWfIJ104 cClycrecl l:y
htl111idily
column ""r1'l.,,,n,,,1 ng 10 rcading-s of the and'dry the reading of the.
Table 55
Density, Prcs<;urc ~nd. Free; Path of Nitrogen Molecules in _________ tne Earth s Atmosphere .-~-~~-_.-.
lIeight, km _____
II 10
20
;w
~_.
I
tllt1l
1_ _- __
I I
~: 0 121)
IliO
:J~'
7.5> ! I . (I~" 1 (I -
,).
I
I I
'L~ii 5
i II
Hd
71,11 :.!! U
4 I}
5U
I
PreCSllrC
I 1
II
i
I
II)
2
III -
.-"-----
Demity,
I
.U
112
In 4.3 n 1.3 10- 2 5.10-, 1.5XI0- 0
(vibrat iOlls or oscillat ions). For example, in the oscillations of a smali ball attached to a string the displacement of ~he [Jall from t!Ie \er\;cal position is continualiy repeated. If the oscillations involve a cllanC(e enly of llwchanical quantities (displacement, velocity, density, acceleration, etc'.) , then we speak of mcchani'lll ovillat ions. Periodic oscillation, an: oscillations in \'.llich each value of the variahle quantity is repcace:d an endless llLnnJ-er of times at regular time inten'als. The sma lies! time ;nierval T which elapses between two successi\'e repetitions of some value of the variable quantity is called the period of
oscillation
Free path,
g"::~--~-~I-~--=-,~--
l'-4°~Q
I. Harmonic Motion Motions (or chanC(es of state) which h a certain extent repeat themselves ilt regular inten'ab of time are called in physics and enC(ineering vibratiollal or oo,cillulory flwtlOllS
(;.5X10-:J 1,:lXIO'" ~. GX Iii -" 4.2X 10-4 1.8XIO-' n.IXIII-' 3.2XI0" 1.5x10' 5XI0 1
-------'-----
The
reciprocal of the period
\'
==';r
is called the
fre-
quency. The unit of frequency i, the herlz, or cycle per second (cycle 'sec). The hertz is the frequency of periodic oscillation whose period i, 1 sec. Harmonic motion is defined as periodic variaiicm of a quantity which can be expressed as a sine or cosine function: (3, I) x == A sin (wt
+ en,
at
The posil!ve
quantity A in (3,1) is called the amplitude q) - the phasc (or pllase angle),
harmonic mot iOIl, (Wi
+
FUNDAMENTAL CONCEPTS AND LAWS
77
16 CH. III. MECHANICAL OSCILLATIONS AND WAVE MOTION
Any kind of periodic motion can be represented to any degree of approximation by a sum of simple harmonic
IF -- the epoch angle. w -
ITlo[icns
the cyclic (or (ngular) frequency; 2n: w ~= = 2n:v. (3,2)
-:r
The phase of harmonic motion determines the value of the variable quantity at any given moment of time. The phase is expressed in units of am;ular me,Lmre (radians or degrees). The angular frequency is' measured in radians per second (rad ians/sec). Ail example of harmonic motion is the projection onto the x (or If) axis of the motion of a particle which is in uniiorm cIrcular motion with an angula~ velocity (J) (Fig. 19), For particles 1 and L the displi:eernents of the projections are, respectively, x, = R sin a = R sin wt, x 2 = R Siii (a q:) = R sin (wt Qj). Oscillations with the same frequency Lut different phase angles are said to be out of phase (or to have a phase
+
di(!<-rcncc).
+
.
'I':I~ dUierenc2 between the epoch an.gles is called the p!w.,e diljaenu' The phase difference behveen two oscilla_--..... tions of the same ..J equency is independent of the choice f of the zero of time. For exam()'·~wt pie, the phase difference beIX Z ! "\~ / : t·.\een the projections of par/): ticles 1 and 2 (Fig. 19) is Ip -----..,,£-'-/-.J--L'-i---X for any arb! trary zero of C \ __i.~.~ ; tine. Hormonic motion is prod uced bv t he action of arestering force. A restor in/!. force is a force which is proportionol in magnitude to the displaceillen( of tile body Fig- 19. Harmonic lllotionof pro· from tbe equilibrium position jectiOlls of bedls desni bing uni· form circulJr lnntiOI1. and is always directed tcwards the equilibrium position. The mathematical express;on of a restoring force Is F = - in:, (3,3) where k is a coefficient of proportionality called th2 restoring force constant. x is the r]i<:p lacemcnt, and the minus si!~n denotes that the force IS always directed towards the. equilibrium position.
~
I
*. 2. The Pendulum
A physico! pendulum is
0 ri!;id body which is supported at some point abo'/e its centre of ;.(ra\'ity. A body thus sUDDerted can perf()~m osciilations. The pendulum is calld o simple (or maLhelJ1atical) pendulum if the entire ma~, of the' body can be regarded as cOEcentrated in one point. A sufficiently close approximat.ion of a simple pendulum is a ~,mcl1 ball (called a penduluI:l lnb) attached to an inexlensible string, if the friction of the oil' ond the pendulum support arc neGligible, ond the dimensions of the ball are small compared with the length of the strin!,. For smoll angular displacements the escillations of a simple pendulum 1l1a\' be considered hannonic. TlIe pcriod of th2 si I1Ip Ie penciu IUIll is :.;i\en by ille formula:
T=2:rt
l/~-~' g
(3,4)
where I is the length of the penduluril, and g is the acceleration of gravi t.y. Tie oscillaFons of a hob suspended frolll a sprin'~ CiOn be considered harmonic if the ar,lp i ilude of oscillcitiOI1 Ee, within the limits of volid:!y of Hooke's law (see p. 41) and frictional forces ore ne..;lic:ib1c. The period of the bob is
T ~= 2:,
!/;~!~ ~
k'
(3,5)
where m is the moss d the be:) and Ii is the coeflicient of elasti1jty of the snrin:;, equal numerically to the force required to stretch the spring by 1 (';11 ",,:' :\ forsional penddwll i" a hody \\hich pCi'lorms [Dtaryoscillatory motion un,le,' the action of a sprill:'. (for example, the balance wheel in v"'itches ,]l1d clucks). Under cedoin conditions (when the :In:plitude of oscillation is sufliciently small a;',d frictional furl','s arc ne~;li:':ib Ie) such n:otion can that ~1l1}" pCj'iodic moti on lI;trt1J()[!i C lliOU on"" cdlcd to tlle
of a In:i '-';l1'-!'l'n:kd
(~L\..:,::i lor \vhich tll~; fclat;o:l (J,J)
78 CH. 111. MECHANICAL OSCILLATIONS AKD WAVE MOTION
also be considered harmonic. The pendulum is given by the formula:
T=')n
-
period of a torsional
liZ J D'
(3,6)
where J is (he moment of ineriia of the body about the axis of rotation, and D is the forsiol7al rigidlll!, equal numerically to the torque required to turn tbe body through uni tangle. The period of a physical pendulum is the formula:
FUNDAMENTAL CONCEPTS AND LAWS
79
where r is the frictional force constant, m - the mass of the body, and k - the restoring force constant. Damped oscillations are depicted graphically by tlIe curve in Fig. 20. The oscillations of a body under the action of periodic driving force are called toned os- !! c illat ions. When the period of the sinusoidal driving force approaches
T where J is the mOi'lent of ineriia of the body about an axis passin'; through tbe point of support, a - the distance from the cenlre of gravi ty to this axis, m - the mass of the !Jou)', (Eld g ---~ the clcce!eration of gravity. Fig. 20.
Damp~;d
oscillaliul1s
3. Flee and Forced Oscillations
The oscillations \vhich a body performs when it is in some lVay displ<1cecl from equili!Jriull1 and then released, are called free (or natllral) osciILlliC)[1s. If tbe free osci Ilations of a arc caused only by a restorini; force, thell they wi 11 be harmonic. The oscillations of a hodv dt'e to the simultaneous action of a rostoritl," force and :1 fricliunal force (which is proportional to ti~o inslantanecu'; v<'loci ty, F = -- rv *, where v is the velocity) iire called dcltlipal . The equation of da:lIped osci llatiolls has the form x .• ~ Ae- Siil (lM (p). The posilive ql1dnlity A is .called th" initial umpiitude, () - the d(l!l'jJ:ng consU'l1t, ile-·· l - the lIlsfal1tancolls vutuc of the amplitude, IJJ -- the frequency, e - the base of the natural system o!
+-
i)
r
2'11 ' (I)
*" T!~(' lt~jJ11h S:'g!l opp()si~.:ly dil(;cteq.
dello!c,
Pi g. 1 --
(3, Sa) (3,8 b)
lilal lil'e velocity and tlJe [or,c arc
:21. l;:l_'
:,LfUllg
the period of natural oscillations of the bodv', the aI11plitude of the forced oscillalions increases sh,lrply (Fig: 21). This phenomenon is ca lIed resonance. " If the fridional forces arc large (strong dall'jllng), [den the resonance is weak (see Fig. 21).
4. Sound Sound is produced by the mechanical
vibrations of elastic media and bodies (solid, liquid and r;aseous) \\'llh frequencies ranging from 17-20 to 20,000 viiJ'ec. Within tl~is range of frequencies 111echal1ical vibr:1Loni call proJuc~ tne sen~ation of sound in the human ear. Mechanical vibrations of frequency below 17 viIJisec are calleel illfrawnic (or subsonic), vibrations of frequency above 20,000 vlb,see are called ultrasonic. Everv musical sound is characterised by loudileos and pitch. the loudness of a sound depends on the alllpiitude of vibrati on, the pitch -- on the frequency.
5. Wave Motion W'ave motion is the propagation of a dislurbance of some
kind. For example, if we strike one end of il netal bar, a local compression arises at that end and pa~"lS alung the bar with a definite velocity.
80 CH. III. MECHANICAL OSCILLATIONS AND WAVE MOTION
The velocitv with which the disturbance advances is called the wai'e velocity. The velocity of mechanical waves depends on tl]e properties of the medium, and in some cases on the frequer,cy. The dependence of the wa" e velocity on the frequency is c81kd disp?fsiO!l of the [-,elucity. Wilen mechanical waves are propagated in a medium the particles of the JiiC'diuJ1l vihrate about equilibrium positions. The velocitv of [he particles of the mediun; i'i c811ed the
velocity of vibration. If, when waves are propagated in a mediul11,
the parameters characteri,inr; the medium (for example, density, particle displacement, pressure, etc.) vary at any ariJitrary pJinl in space accordinr; to a sine function, the V(,."ves are ca lied sine wave'". " An important characteristic of sin2 waves is the wavelength. The ['JCwc!cngth (A) is defined as the distance travelled by the wave in on2 peried:
'Ie
o=c
vT,
(3,9a)
We distinguidl between longiludinal and transverse waves, dependin.g on how the p8rticles ,of the, m~dlUm are displaced with respect to the clirectlOn 01 propdgatlOn of tbe wa(;'a longitudinal W8ve the particles. of the medium oscillate in the direction of propagation: In a transverse wa\e they osci \late perpendicll lar to the. directIOn of propagatIOn of the wave. Mecbanical waves m lrqnlJs and gases are longitudinaL The velocIty of the formula:
x = f1 sin
0)
the frequency, and T-
(t -- ~),
0)
(t - ~ )
is ca lIed the phuse of the wove. The surface, obtained by connecting all points which have a common phase, is called a waue front. Accord-ing to the si:8pe of the wave front we distinguisb between plane, (ljli ndrical and sphaiml wa\"es, '" JiL're UH.:Ji U111
ck':}otc', ;lIJ~,' p,lfdll1ctcr dlaracterising the f:XJ.lLlph:, iJrL:ssure. tCi111'~i'ature, cleo).
Y~ ,
(3, lOa)
('3, lOb)
=
where Q is the c1ensitv of the medium, E - Young's modulus, and [J. -- Poisson's ratio (see Tal?le 17). The velocity of longitudinal waves m fluids is given by the formula: (3,11)
which describes the variation of some parameter of tIle medium through which sine W8\'es are passing is called the cquat inn of sin(' [.2)(I'Uf,';;;:. In this exprc:"c;io!1 A is the: amplitude of the ,;;:a 1.'(' , 0 ) - fhe cyclic freqnency, r - the distance from the source initiating the \'.ale to the point of interest in the medium,
v - the ve locity of the wave; the expression
C~
where E is Young's modnl'ls and Q is !11e density. The velocity of longitudinal waves In a sohd, the transverse di mens ions of which are much greater than the wavelength, is VI
III '
t d' I I'n a rod is ciiven by longi u ma waves b VI
V
where v is the wave velocity, v the period. The mathematical expression
81
FUNDAMENTAL CONCEPTS AND LAWS
state
of
tile-
is the isothermal compressibility *, V = Cz.. where I'll p cv ve loci ty of tr8nsverse waves is given by The VI
=
V f' C
(3,12)
where G is the modulus of shear. The velocity of sound waves in gases is expressed by the formula: Vsotlll d =
'VY'Q'P
-
(3,13a)
where V = ~!'.. , and p is the pressure.
cv
* For compre;si bi lily sec p.41. Isolhertllal compre3sibility -- compression takes place at constant temperature,
82 CH.U!. MECHANICAL OSCILLATIONS AND WAVE MOTION
Formula (3,13) app lies to ideal gases, in which case it can be written in the form: vsound
=
V y:r.
(3,13b)
Waves on the surface of a liquid are neither transverse, fiGr longitudinal. The particles of a liquid descljbe more complex motions in surface waves (Fig. 22). '>
tiJ
(J
oj
o
fa
FUNDAMENTAL CONCEPTS AND LAWS
positions (if the waves are of small amplitude and the rnedium is non-viscous). The quantity of er]('r~y trnnsmitted per "econd ncross 1 square centimeter perpendiculiJr to tire direction of prupagation of the wave is c?olled the illiemily of the wave Intensity is expressed in watts/ern' or ergs/cm' sec. When mechanical waves travel through a medium the ve· locity and acceleration of the particles of the medium vary according to the same sine tawas does the displacement. If the amplitude of displacement of the particles is x when II sine wave of cyclic frequency w passes through the medium, then the amplitude of vibration of the particles will be (3,16)
u J =(0X,p
o
83
tile amplitude of acceleral;on of the parlicles (3,17)
a<J == (1).'?XO '
and the intensity of the wave 1
•
1=2 '.wu~,
(318)
Vsur= -V gh. (3,15) Wave motion is accompanied by the transfer of energy; the particles of the medium, however, are not carried along with the wave but only osci Ilate about their equi librium
where Q is the density of the medium, v -_. the '.'.ave \"elocrty, and U o - the maxImum \eiocity of vilJrah;11 of the particles. The maximum increase in pressure in the medium (t'1p,,) due to the propagation of sound waves is ca \led the sound pressure. The following relation exists belween the sound pressure and the maximum ve loci ty of vibration of the part· icles: t'1PJ=Qvu o' (3,19) The intensity of sound corresponds to the subjective sens3tion of loudness. Below a certain minimum intelbitv, Galled the threshold of audibility, sound is no longer audible to the human ear. The threshold of audibility is different for sounds of different frequencies. Sound of g~reat intensity produces only a painful sensation in the ear. The smallest intensity of sound causing such a sensation is called the threshold of feeling. A change in intensity (intensity level) is expressed in decibels (db). The intensity level B of a sound is deflned as
• Formula (3. I 4) appli es to waves on a Ii qui d-gas interface, when the density of tne liquid is much greater than that of the gao.
1 B=\O 10gT.
Fig. 22. Trajectories of particles of water in surface waves: shallow water. b) very deep water (very large ratio 2~h 2"h T)' c) very shallow water (very small raHaT)'
a)
The velocity of surface waves V sur
=
*
is given by
... / gA 2rtCl JI 2rt+1Q'
(:3,14)
where g is the acceleration of gravity, 'A - the wavelength, a - the surface tension, and Q - the density. Formula (3,14) applie" when the depth of the liquid is Hot less than 0.51". When the depth of the liquid h is less than 0.51", the velocity is expressed by the formula:
o
6*
.1 85
TABLES AND GRAPHS 8" cH. III. MECHANICAL OSCILLATIONS'vD WAVE MOTION
"
As a rule, in acoustics 10 is taken equal to 1O-g erg jcm 2scc, which is approximately equal to the threshold of audio bility at I,()OO c!sec. Mechanical waves. like electromagnetic waves (see Chapter V: Optics) undergo reflection, refraction, diffraction ans mterference.
TABLES AND GRAPHS
Table 56 Velocity of Sound in Pure Liquids and Oils Liquid
Tempera-I
I
ture,
we
Veloci ty. m/sec
I
Temperature coeffi ci en t. m/sec degree
Pure liquids Acetone Allilinc BCllZ('I1C
Ethyl alcohol Glycerine I-lcavy waie~ Mercury Methyl alc~l;oj Ordi nary watee Sea water
20 20 20 20 20 25 20 20 25 17
1,192 1,65G
I ,326 1,180 1,923 1,399 1,451 1,123 I ,497 1,510-1,550
-5.5 -4.6 -5.2 -3.6 -1.8 2.8 -0.41> -3.3 2.5
Oils Cedar nut Eucalyptus Gasoline Hemp seed Kerosene Olive Peanut Rapeseed Spindle Transfor;11~r
29 29.5 34 31.5 34 32.5 31.5 30.8 32 32.5
1,406 1,276 1,250 1,772 1,295 1,381 1,562 1,450 1,342 1,425
Nole. The velocity of sound in liquids decreases with a rise In temperature (with the exception 01 water). The velocity at temperatures other than those given in the table can be computed from the lormula: Vt=vo [1 +~ (I-tol]. where Va is the velocity given in the table. ~ - the temperature coelficient given in the last column of the table for pure liquids, t- the temperature lor which the vel.ocity is sought, and to - the temperature i ndi cated in the table.
Velocity of Sound in Solids at 20 e C
Material
Aluminium Brass Caoutchouc Coal (briquelles) Copper Cork Ebon! te Glass. crown heavy crown heavy flint light Hint silica Hematite. lJrown Ice Iron. Lea'd Limestone Marble Mica Nickel Plaster of Pari s Plexiglas Polystyrene Porcelain. ~ubber . Sandstone Slate Steel. carbon Tin Tungsten Zinc
Table 57
Veloc; ly of Velocity of Veloci ty of transverse long! tudinal longitudi waves nfll waves waves in infiin infiui te nite medium, in rods, medium, m,isec m/sec m:,sec
5,080 3,490
3,710 500 l ,570 5,300 4,710 3,490 4,.550 5,370 3,280 .5, 170 2,640
4,785
4,884 46
5,050 2,730 4,310 3,
~)
l0
o,2GO 4,430 1 ,479 3,700 4,700 2,40.5 5,660 5,260 3,760 4,800 5,570 1,830 3,980 5,850 3,600 6, l30 6,150 7,760 5,630 4,970 2,670 2,350 5,340 1,040 3,700-4,900 5.870 6,100 3,320 5,460 1, 170
3,080 2,123 2,000 :2,:! GO
3,420 2,060 2,220 2,950 3,513 1, D90 3,230 1,5DO 3,200 3,260 2, l60 2,%0 2,370 1,121 1,120 3,120 27
2,ROO 3,300 1,670 ~?
, C,2 U
:.i,110 -
---_._---
86 CH. III, lVIECHA:'!ICAL OSCILLATIONS AND WAVE lVIono:'!
Table 58 Velocity of Seismic Waves Mcch;mi cal \V<1ves travelling in the earth's crust arc called seismic waves. Seismic waves can be longitudinal (compressional waves) or transverse (shear waves).
Depth, km
Velocity of jongi tudi 11a1 waves. kl11,.:'sec
I
Veloci ty of ir ans verse waves. km'sec
Sound Velocity Versus Pressure in Air and Nitrogen The curves of Fig. 23 refer to 25°C and arp valid in the frequency range from 200 !\cjsee to 500 !\cjsec.
Table 59
I '5
n
IV/lro
Sound Frequency Spectrum Fig. 24 gives the spectrum of sound frequencies di vi ded into octaves as ; s customary in music. The piano keyboard is de pi cted alongsi de the spectrum; it covers practically all the frequencies used in musiC. The ratio of the frequenci es of two mus; cal tones is called an interval. An octave is an interval with a frequency
0-20 20-4" 1,300 2,400
8•.
TABLES AND GRAPHS
4/1'
345
I)
..
50
JQ
f±R~~~aflf!
ratio ~ =2.
!!!
Fig. 23.
Velocity of Sound in Gases at t atm . Tempcra-! Veloci ty, hue, a C misec
Gas
AIr Ammonia Benzene (vapOllr) Carlvl11 dioxic!t: DCl!1criuTTl " Eti -:1 alcO~101
HcU um . Hydrogen . Methyl alcollOl Ncon . Nitro,c;cll . Oxygen Water vapour
.
o o 97 o o ~17 o o
97
o o o
134
Temperature coefficient. m/sec degree
8.i56%-1 ;:=:.--
331 415 202 259 890 269 965 1,284 335 435 334 31 G 494
0.59 TrOmOolll'
0.3 0.4
b::
" ~c· :::: ~ Trombone ~
~ 1:~i£7~=:d ~ IbY' woman YOlce
Ir'EII/e drum
rtllldomel1lallrt'!1v{'!J CIt'S
of Yowe/s prOIJOUf/
i- 3 ------=~
/0445%
}
HOS',
~}
IJO 5 %
t
~ Or7t711
'
2my. }
65?8'/.r
Fig. 24. Spectrum of sound frequencies, divided into octaves. On the left of the figure arc shown the runge of the strongest frequencies of some musical instruments and the loudest frequencies of men's and women's voices in pronouncing vowels. The frcquClldes are plOl ted lo~ari thmi cally.
}
522.2%
cetlQymans vOIce
Not~s .. 1.. The v~locity of 5,ound i II gases ;It constant pressure jncre~ ases \\1t11 lllcrease In tbe tcmp<:r'liure. The temperature coefficient of the velocity is therefore give'I1 ill till' table, so that the velocity can be computed for other tc;nj)l.':';ttllrf..":;. 2. 1\t high frcqw:Ilcies (or 10\\ Df,c"'ures) the velocity of sound depends Oil the frequency. TIle v::1uC's ~"ivcll the taule are for frequcncies and pressures at \\"hich tl1e \'clocitv is praeti cally independent of the frequency. •
1
20,f9% }
~-
~
1.6
0.4 0.1\ 2.2 0.46 0.8 0.6 0.56
~
4I?8"l's
r }'
~r-_--,l"2",.5,,,4-,%-,,} /6J!Y:s
~, 88 CH. III. MECHANICAL OSCILLATIONS AND WAVE MOTION
Frequency _ _ _ _ _-,-_7--
o 5 cycles 'sec- I I cycles,'sec20 eycles,sec-
u
Emi ltcr . __ , - - - - - - -
TABLES AND GRAPHS
N at ural occurrence
Ficid of application
,._.:'
_ Vi brati OIlS of \Vat cr in natural re· scrvoirs and vibrations of bodies (frequencies bela,,· IG cycles seq. Sound of heart beals
C
i
1 Kc,secS]
Voices of Iltlman be~nimals, etc. cal inslruments, ~;\1cs ,ifens loud l'akcr~: ~tc. '
COlllITlunic8tion and tion;
11leaSUrClTlcnt
of
Sl 1::11 ali s3-
distance
by means 01 sound
Voices of human beings, animals, bi rds. insects. Sounds of v3ri nus nat ura!
phenomena (wi Bd, water. elc.)
thund...:r,
[lo\Vlllg
10 Kc sec-
------------,--20 Kc,seeSonar
lJltrasonic sirens and \\'lJistks, magnctostrictivc ;lI1d niezo·
I Mc/sec-
Emitted by bats, crickels, locusts UHra::-;onic cIc-ani ngrarL'<;
I electric o::cil1ators,ctc.
of
eli c; nc and bi ology
I
9-----'1 "
.~
PiezoC'lectric cs(i 11;:~ (quartz, b,lriurn ti tanate. loufIllaIine,
10 2 Mcsec-
tors
I
U1tra~"'~HJic f
Scientific re:o;carch
10' Me/sec-
to
Mc.scc-
Thef1:Jal
vibr3tions
Iof molecules I
detection
ill
mCUds. concrete, etc. Ultrasonic mi croscope
et c.)
t 0' Me'sec--
II I
I
too cyc1es!sec-
10 Me scc-
I
j
I .,•
Low-frequency vi brations of bodies
~ ~
t
89
Sed 11 t i fi c research
TABLES AND GRAPHS
90 CII. III. MECHANICAL OSCILLA TIONS AND WAVE MOTION
Velocity of Water Surface Waves At small wavelengths (less than 2 em) the decisIve Iactor is the surface tension: such waves are called cGpillarlj waves. At greater wavelengths the decisive factor is gravity, and the waves are called gravity waves. The velocity of surface waves depends on the wavelengih (see (3,14», if the depth of the liquid is sufficienHy great (h.> O. G' ).
Displacement, Velocity and Acceleration of Water Particles due to Passage of Sound Waves of Various Intensities. Figs. 28, 29, 30 give the amplitudes of the displacement velocity and acceleratIon, computed from forl1lulas (3,lli), (3,17) al;d (3.18). The computations have been carried out for ',V-::::::::. 1. 5 X 10 5 g.'cm 2 sec 'Ihe scales on both axes arc logari thmic.' " •
1000
1\
91
r-=:+=rrQ;2':I:;:2'l::E'lJ
8M"
--
1\
'\ ,--.,...
C<7jJ.
I
l--
i
ooe r---t--t-J-1
l--l--
400
C,<71/e
1
.?
3 4 5 W<7velellflll.,C1Q
8
Fig. 26. Dispersion of surface waves
(!z>
0.5).).
Loudness of Audibly Perceived Sounds Fig. 27 gives the curves of intensity of sounds of equal loudness. The upper curve corresponds to the threshold of feeli ng, the lower-to the threshold of audibi lily. The frequencies are plotted on a logarithmi c scale. (}
1JirPSlJo/d ofief'l!lifj
1-'
O.
I -
10/} /}
/.!;J!E'llS/!jI
~
100 6'0
.;
/}
7IJ
t-----.---- t--
Ico
f'.....~
"""
!
-II. . -i £1[-:!
1
jIJ
IJO
""'"-"'
20
10 0
i !
'I 100
r-r-- :-
---"/,
:-/. 'L/
---tF:tt-
V, L/ L/
,
,,00 h"7UeJ1CIj, '/3
hg. ").7,
/(}(JO
I-
-
L/
r--1-
-I -I
t---f-
/
-I-
"1"
7
~
5IJ
."-..:: 1'--...1'--
I
I I
o
1-~"'-...... ---t-
"
jpW'ls
10 -.... t--.. 90 -
/}
?IJ
1
-
120
-1'--1-...... I'--
- , fJOb/) 10000
Fig. 28. Displacement of particles OJ water in propagation of sound waves.
Fig. 29. Acceleration of ~articles of water in propavatiOIl of sound waves.
r::=:j==r-=T+1=:::J=:=r:::-fI
1011 8Jf-
,,60 I-~'f--:--~-I ~.
1----
1<71---+---:-
t 201--1----'---1 ~
~:±=-:::t::P11--=-=
"'1091-~
~~
'<: 4
Fig.3()
water
\· . . ' 1ch'itv of p:trljl,'l·
in
(If
propagation of soulld waves~
92 CH. Ill. MECHANICAL OSCILLATIONS AND WAVE MOTION
93
TABLES AND GRAPHS
Table 60 Sound Intensity and Sound Pressure Corresponding to the Main Frequencies of the Decibel Scale Decibel scale
Sound i ntensi ty. 2 \ \}..·'att,fcm \
Sound pressure. dynes/em'
Sounds of the given intensl\y
o
10 -10
0.0002
Threshold of audibility human ear.
10
10- 's
0.000G5
Rustle of leaves. Low whi sper at a distance of I m.
20
10- "
0.002
Quiet garden.
30
10 -"
0.00G5
Quiet room. Average sound level in an auditorium. Violin playing pianissimo.
40
10 -'2
0.02
Low music. room.-
50
10-"
0.OG5
Loudspeaker at low Noise in a restaurant with open windows.
GO
10-'0
0.2
Noise
of
Tobie 51 Reflection Coefficient of Sound Waves for Various Interfaces (at normal incidence), 0/,) The reflection coefficient is defined as the ratio of the intensities of the rellected and incident sound waves.
Material
the
in a living volume. or olii ce
!(adio turned on lOUd. Noise in a store. Average level of speech at a distance of 1 m.
70
10- 9
0.G45
:Koise of a truck motor. Noiseln· si de a tramcar.
80
10 -R
2.04
Noisy street. Typists' room.
90
10- 7
6.45
Automobile horn. Large symphony orchestra playi ng fortissi mo.
100
10- 9
20.4
Riveting machi ne. siren.
110
10- 5
64.5
Pneu mati c ha m mer.
120
10- 1
200
Jet engine at a distance of 5 m. Loud thunderclaps.
130
10- 3
645
Threshold of feeling, sound is no longer audible.
Automobile
72 21 74 24 o 18 2 Aluminium (',] 0.3 88 0.8 o 10 Q;>pper t.);") 31 67 34 o Glass . 75 16 76 10 Mercury So 0.2 90 o Nickel o b!) bb Steel . . . o 0.6 Transformer oi I u Water Notes. I. The reflection coefficient is the same for sOllnd passing kom mercury i nta steel and vi ce versa. 2. Upon rellection from a plate the reflection coefficient depends on the ratio of the thl ckness of the plate to the wavelength.
Table 62 Absorption Coefficient of Sound in Di Iferent Materials (upon R.eflection) The absorption coefficient of sound (upon reflecUon) is defined as the ratio of the energy absorbed to the energy i nci deut on the reflecti ng surface.
~ requel1eY, c/sec
125
250
0.024 0.03
0.025 0.04
500
1,000
2,000
1,000
O.Oell
0.049 0.24 0.02
0.07 0.35 0.60
Material
Bri ck wall (unplaste. red) . . • • . . Cotton materi al Glass. sheet Glass wool (9 em thick, . Hair felt (25 mm thick) . Marble . . . . . Plaster. gypsum Plaster, Ii me . . Rug with nap . Wooden planking
0.03
0.17
0.32
0.40
0.51
O.GO
0.65
0.18
0.36
0.71
0.79
0.01 0.013
0.025 0.09 0, 10
I
0.032 0.11 I 0.027
0.020 0.06 0.21
o. on O.OS5
0.820.85 0.015 0.04 0.05 0.043 11.058
0.27
0.27
O. II
0.08
0.082\ 0.11
0.01
0.015 0.045 0.08 0.11
0.37
FUNDAMENTAL CONCEPTS AND LAWS
95
The magnitude of any electric charge is alwavs a multinle of a certain m~nimurr~ ,charse, called the elementary ch(l~ge (e); e=4.8xIO IUCGSE unds. A region in which electric forces act is called an electric field. Electrically charged bodies are always surrounded bv an electric field. The field due to fixed charges is called an electrostatic {ield. :rhe force. acting on unit positive charge placed at a gIven pomt 15 called the intensity of the electric field at that point:
CHAPTER IV
ELECTRICITY A. THE ELECTROSTATIC FIELD
FUNDAMENTAL CONCEPTS AND LAWS
E=!- . (4,3) q lhe intensity is a vector quanlity. The direclion of the intensity coincides with that of the force acting on a positive «harge. The field intensities due to two separate eleclric t:harges are added according to the parallelogram law, i.e., by vector methods. The electrostatic field intensity of a point charge is
There are two hinds of electric charges - posi live and negative. Positive charges are the ~;ind which are generated on a glass rod which has been rub bed wi th si lk, and a Iso charges which are repelled by them. Negative charges are the kind which are generated on an ebonite rod when rubbed with fur, and also the charges which arc repelled by them. Like charges repel each other, unlike charges attract each other. Interaction of charges. Electric field. The law of interaction of point charges was established experimentally by Coulomb:
where r is the distance from the point for which the intensity is sought to the charge. The electric field intensity of a uniformly charged surface is
(4,1~
(4,5)
where F is the force of interaction, ql and q2 - the magnitudes of the charges, r - the distance between them, and e - a quantity called the dielectric constant at the medium. In the case of vacuum the dielectric constant is denoted by e u' and formula (4,1) takes the form
where (J is the charge per unit surface. . The electric field intensity of a uniformly charged sphere
(4,2)
In the CGSE system of units eo=l; in the MKSA system =1/9 X 10 9 farad/m. . . The CGSE unit of charge IS defined as that charge which when p laced I cm from an eq ua 1 charge in vacuum exerts upon it a force of I dyne. The practical unit of charge (MKSA system) is the coulomb: 1 couJomb=2.99793x 10 9 CGSE units~3 X 10' CGSE units. 80
E=!L Br 2
'
(4,4)
IS
q
(4,6) E=2' er where r is the distance from the point for which the intensHy is sought to the center of the sphere. The electric field intensity of a charged cylinder is
E=2q' £r '
(4.,7)
where q' is the charge per unit length along the axis of the cylinder, and r is 111(' distance trom the po(nt of interes: to the axis of the cy Hnder.
ClI. IV. ELECTRICITY
96
The lines of fora' of an electric field are defined as cun'c e • the tangents 10 which at each point coincide in direc-
0)
Fig, 31.
~
FUNDAME)/T AL CONCEPTS AND LAWS
by the. electric forces in moving unit positive charge from one pOint to another is defined as the potential difJerence between the two points (U). The potential at a point is defined as the potentia~ difference between that point and an arbItr~f1ly. chosen pomt of zero potential. The point of zero potentIal IS frequently taken at infinitv. The work of displacement of a charge q in an electrostatic field is
A=qU.
f;)
Lines of force of point c1J<1rg-cs: posi ti ve. IJ) negative,
(1)
97
(4,8)
The unit of potential in the MKSA system is the volt (v), defl11ed as the po~entlal dIfference between two points when work ~qual to I Joule must be performed to bring I coulomb of posItive charge from one point to the other. A surface all points of which are at the same potential, is called a~
equipotential surface.
The lines of force of the field are perpendicular to the electric forces on an equipotentIal surface. Let A and 13 be two points of the field' then the following approximate relation exists between th~ intensity of the Held at the point A and the potential difference between these points: ~quipotential surfaces. No work is done by the m mO~lng a charge from one point to another
I, l
I
0.) Fig. 32. Lines of b)
I1U
force: (1) field of two unlike point charges. field of two lil,e poi nt.charges.
E A =-i5.T'
(4,9)
w~ere I1U
is the potential difference between the close-lying pomts A and B. and 111 IS the distance along the line of torce between the equipotential surfaces passing through fhese points . . If the electric fiel.d is homogeneous, i.e., if the intensity IS constant In magmtude and direction at all points of the field (for example, in a parallel plate capacitor), then
Fig. 33. Electric field of parallel plate condenser.
lion with the intensity vector. The lines of force of variou> electric fields are illustrated in P'igs. 31, 32 and 33. Work and potential. When a charge is disp laced under the influence of an electric field work is performed. In an electrostatic field the magnitude of the work performed is independent of the path of the charge. The work p8rformed
E=-!!.. I ' where I is t.he length. of the line of force. In the MKSA ~ystem the Inter:s!ty 1S expressed in voltsjmeter (Vim). 1 vim IS equal to the l?tenslty of a homogeneous tield in which the potenhal difference between the ends of c line of force I m long is equal to I v. The potential difference per unit
7
3a1{. 46
98
FUNDAMENTAL CONCEPTS AND LAWS
CH. IV. ELECTRICITY
length of a line of force in a homogeneous field is called the potential gradient. . . Capacitance. Two conductors with an electnc field between them whose lines of force emanate from one conductor and terminate on the other form a capacztor; the conductors themselves are called the capacitor plates. In a simple capacitor the two plates carry opposite charges of equal magnitude. The capacitance of a capacitor is defined as the ratio of the charge on one of the plates to the potential difference between the plates, i.e.,
q
(4.10)
C=U'
The lv\KSA unit of capacitance is the farad. I farad is equal to the capacitance of a capacitor. the potential dif. ference between whose plates is equal to I v when the charge (on one of the plates) is I coulomb. The CGSE unit of ca. pacitance is the CPI1t;lIv"tcr (cm). . According to the shape of the conductln,£( surfaces capac. itors are called paraLLel plate. cylindrical and spherical. The capacitance of a parallel plate capacitor is
C
eS <=
(4,11)
4nd '
where S is the surface mea of one plate (the smaller one in case they are unequal), d - the distance between the plates, I'; the dielect~ic constant. The capacitance of a cylindrical capacitor and of a coaxial cable is
el C=--b-' 21n a
(4,12)
where b is the radius of the outer cylinder, a - the radius of the inner cvlindH. and l - the length of the capacitor. The capaci tance of a spherical capacitor is I';
C·- ---lO-
a
b
(4,13)
99
where a and b are the radii of the inner and outer spheres. The capacitance of a two-wire line is
C=_e_l_ 4In.i£'
(4,14)
a
where d is the distance between the axes of the wires, atheir radius. and I - the length. The capacitance of a multiple capacitor is
C O.088eS (n - I)
(4,15) d where S is the area of one plate, n - the number of plates, d - the distance between two adjacent plates. If capaci tors of separate capacitances C" C2 , C, ... , Cn are connected in parallel the capacitance of the whole system is
Cpar=C 1
+ C + C, + '.. + C'l'
(4,16)
2
for a system of capacitors connected in tance is I 1 I I
C=C+C+C+", 5er 1 2 3
series
the
capaci-
I
+ C' II
(4,17)
The energy stored in a charged capacito'r is given by the formula
W'=;
CU
2
,
(4,18)
The spac€ in which an electric field exists contains stored energy. The energy in unit volume of a homogeneous field (energy density) can be computed by the formula
eE2 w=8Jt ' where E is the field intensi ty
(4,19)
*.
• In the case of an inhomogeneous fi eld one deli nes the "energy density at a point":
w=
lim
~U:::.
,lV..,.O t>V
Here ,l\V is the energy concentrated in the volume ,lV when the latter ·contracts" to a point. If we define E as the intensity at this point, then formula (4,19) is valid for an arbitrary field.
I. t
CH IV. ELECTRICITY
100
Conductors and insulators in an electric field. When a conductor is placed in an electric field charges of unlike sign are induced on it (charging by induction). These charges are distributed over the surface of the conductor in such manner that the intensitv of the electrostatic field inside the conductor is zero, an"d the surface of the conductor is an equipotential surface. Insulators (dielectrics), when placed in an electric field, become polarised, i.e., the charges of the molecules are displaced in such manner that their external electric field resemb les the field of two unq l/ like point charges of equal magnitude (see Fig. 32, a). In general, a system of charges whose external fteld resem{ b les the fte ld of two un]i ke point charges of equal magnitude is called an electric dipole (Fig. Fig. 34. Electric dipole. 34). The dipole is characterised by a vector quantity called the electric dipole moment (Pi): (4,20) pi,=ql,
b:q;:j) .. +
ct= -
TABLES AND GRANtS
intensity of the electric field. A substance exhibits lerroelectric properties at temperatures which do not exceed a certain temperature called the Curie point (Te). The piezoelectric eU'ed. Upon the mechanical deformation of some crystals along given directions electric charges of opposite sign appear on different faces of the crystal, while inside the crystal an electric field arises. !I. change in the direction of the deformation causes a change in the sign of the charges. This phenomenon is ca lied the piezoelectric effect. The piezoelectric dIect is reversible, i.e., when a crystal is placed in an electric field its linear dimensions change. The inverse piezoelectric elTect is uti lised to generate ultrasonic frequencies. The Illagni tude of the charge which arises in the piezoelectric effect is given by the relation
where F x is the force causing deformation, and d'l is a constant for the given crystal called the piezoelectric constan:.
where I is the distance between the charges. The direction of the vector Pi is taken from - q to q. The vector sum of all the moments of the elementary dipoles in a unit volume is called the polarisation of the dielectric:
+
P=~Pi
(4,21)
The molecules of some dielectrics are dipoles even in the absence of an electric field. In the case of such substances polarisation consists in an alignment of the elementary dipoles in the direction of the field. ., Ferroelectrics (seignette-eleetrics). S~me dlelec~ncs even in the absence of an electric Held contam small (microscopIC) rei~ions which are polarised in d iHerent dir:ections. Suc.h dielectrics are called l'erroel2ctrics. The magmtude of theIr polarisation is characterised by the v:ctor of intrinsic (spontaneous) polarisation Ps. The properties of a ferroelectrIC (e.!!., ils dielectric constant, etc.) depend on the magmtude of the vector Ps. The dielectric constants, of ferroelectncs are usually large aIlLI depend to a cOllslderaule degree on the
101
TABLES AND GRAPHS Table 63 Electric Field in the Earth's Atmosphere Alti tude. km
Intensity, vim
()
130
Notes. 1. The charge of ;:) tht111rlerC'1o!1d is equal to I O-~'" coulomhs (in some cases it may be as much as 300 coulombs). 2 The mean surface dClIsit"y of charg-e of the earth Is 3.45 CGSE units'cm:l • The total charge of the c:lrth i~ O.5? X 10 1) (ouloI111)5.
----------------
102
TABLES AND GRAPHS
CH. IV. ELECTRICITY
Insulat ing Materials e1eelri c constant, (CGSE uni tS)
])i
Material
Di eleelri c strength, kv/rnm
Densi ty, gem'
Table 65
Table 64
Dielectric Constants of Some Pure Liquids (CGSE System of Units) ResistiVity. ohm em
Temperature Substance
Asbestos Bakelite Beeswax Birch, dry Bitumen Carboli te (P) Celluloi d Ebonitc (RP) Eskapoll (p) Fibre board, dry Fluoplastic-3 . . . Getillax (lamiinsulanated tion) (P) Glass Gulla pcrrha Marble Mica, fIluscovi te Mica, phlogopite Para ifi n Plexiglas Pol yst vrene Polyvinyl chlori de resi n Porcelain, electrical Pressboard
Radioporcel~i~ (C)
Rosin Rubber, soft Shellac . Silk, natural Slate Textoli te Ticond (C) Ultra porcelai n (C) Vinyl plasti c (I')
4-4. G 2.8-2.9 3-4 2.0-3.3 3-4 4-4.5 2.7-3 2.5-8 2.5-2.7 5-G.5 4-10 4 8-10 4.5-R 4-5.5 2.2-2.3 3.0-3. G 2.2-2.8
3.1-3.5 G.5 3·4 6.0 3.5 2.6-3 3.5 4-5 6-7 7 25-80 6.3-7.5 4. I
2 10-40 20-35 40-00 0-15 10-14.5 30 25 30 2-0 10-30 20-30 15 G-IO 50-200 00-125 20-30 18. '> 25-50 50 20 9-12 15-20 15-25 50 5-14 2-8 15-20 15-30 15
2.3-2. G 1.2 0.9G 0.7 1 2 I. 2-1.3 1.3 I . I-I .94 2.14
1.3 2.2-4. a 0.95 2.7 2.8-:3.2 2.5-2.7 a . 4-0.9 1.2 I. 05-1. G5
103
OOC
I
10°C
2XI05 2XIOlO_2X1015
2X I 0 1 • I X lOla 5XIO' 1.2XI0" 10 II_lOt< 2X I 0' I X I 0 10
Acetone 23.3[22.5 Benzene 2.30 Carbon tetrachloride Elhyl alCOhol 27.8H 213.41 Ethyl etIter 4.80 4.58 Glycerine Kerosene Water 87.8:1 83.86
I
20 C C
I
2GoC
I
30°C
I
I
,10°C
I
50°C
21 .4 20.9 20.:> 19.5 18.7 2.2D ~.27 2.20 2.25 2.22 2.24 ~.23 ~.OO ~. 18 25.00 :2·1.2;:} 23.52 :22.1(1 2U.87 '1.38 4.27 4.15 5G.2 2.0 80.UR 78.25 713. ·17 7:3.02 G9.73
Note. Small quantities of impurities the vallie of the di eledri c constant.
have a neg-Ugi tde effect
on
10"_10 17 3 X I A" 5X I OIC-5X I 017
Table (i6
1.38 2.4 0.9-1. I 2.5-2. G 1.1 1.7 -2. a 1.02
3X lat<· I X la'
2.6-2.9 I. 3-1.4 3.8-3.9 2.6-2.9
10'
5X 10 15 4x10 13 IxlOto
3X 10"
Notes. I. The dielectric strength characterises the maximum potential difference which can be applied to a dielectric without destroying its insulating properties. 2. The lellers i II the pare'ltheses denote: (P) - plastic, (C) - ceo ramie, (RP) - rubber plastic. 3. The values of :he dielectric constant are given for temperatures 18 to 20°C. The dielectric conste n !3 of solids vary but slightly with the temperature, with the exceptio!, of ferroelectrics (see Figs. 35. 36). 4. Fo'r resistivity refer to p. 108.
Dielectric Constants of Gases at 18°C and Normal Pressure Substance
Air . Carbon dioxide Helium . . H"drogen
E
(CGSE)
1.00059 I. 00097 1. (J0007 I. 00026
Substance
Ki trag-en
..•
I Oxyg-en . . . . I Water vapollr
E
(CGSE)
I. (J0061 I. OUOGS 1 . (J078
Note. The dielectric constants of gl.';~0:; decrease wi tIl an increase In the temperature, and increase with an increase in the pressure.
TABLES A:\'D GRAPHS
Cll. IV. ELECTRICITY
t04
Table 67
105
Dependence ?f Dielectric Constant of Some Ferroelcetrics on tne Temperature and Field Intensity
Some Properties of Ferroelectric Crystals
"
o
'0
Crystal
0.
UO
LiNH, (C,H,O,)· H 2 O KH 2 PO, (potassium di hydrophosphate)
RbI-:,PO, KI-!,AsO, I'H,Il 2 PO, (ammoni um bydropliosphate) Ba TiO (barium titanate) KNbO, !\aNbOe, UTlO,
123 147
.-
~::
:5c;:j
C)"'->::l
em
C;E~O
297 (upper) ~55 (lower) 308 (upper) 249 (lower) 106
u
o.::·e~
'"
3~
NaK (C,Il,0,).4I1 2 0 (Rochelle salt) NaK (C,H,D 2 O,,)·4D 2 O
;;;-
~ c~ ~ o.~·c
()~l.:-l
"=:·"';;;ifJ
",,0
,
"""'<J)c.._
o2~
800
200
630 F.i~. 3S: Tetllperature ~1,le,eetnc COllst,1I1L of
45
16,000
l}lC
two
curves
dCI'Cllc1cIL"('
f.~ociJclle
correspolu:!
jo
1\\"~
dlHcrcllt \"ulucsoflhc ficld intellOily.
90.5
di-
58 391 708 913
i8,OOO
!. 000-1,700
70.000 ~,
Notes. 1. Ferroelectri cs are divided into three I':rOllps according to their cbemical formulas.
2. Some ferroelectrics exhibit their spcci ric properties withi n a given range of temperaturcs. For these the table indicates the upper and 100\"er Curi c points. 3. The values of the dielectric constants are g-iven Jor weak fields.
,j
IhI':;J!'!'a!vrc,·nc
4. The symLol [) dcnotes hcavy hydrogcn (dl'l1terium). Fig' ..3fl. Tl-:mprr:ltllfc depcnd('llCC of dl~:lc;_·tf1(, constant of It'lTO-
electncs of the barium titauale group.
/I
!
r±
4
5
/id:'/li7/;",7S//;",e::
S
10
106
tIl. IV. ELECTRICITY
fUNDIlMENTAL CONCEPTS AKD LAWS
Table 68 Piezoelectric Cor,stants of Some Crystals Piezoelectric constant, CGSE units (d ll Xl 0 8 )
Crystal
Ammonium phospholc (A:U') . . . Polarised burium titanate ceramic Potassium phosphate (K,UP) Quartz . . . Rochelle salt Tourmaline Zinc blende
148
750 70 6.9 7,000 5.78 9.8
Notes. 1. Some crys!als have di Herent cOI"lants for di!lerenl directions of deformation; in sueh caSE'5 the greiltc';t values a~c gl~ven. 2. III order to convert the value of the cOllstant from CGSE to MKSA units militiply the fig-lire g-iven in the tahle by 3X I 0'. The COtIstalli \\'ill 1llt'll be cxprcsseq i 11 coulombs'newton.
107
of current in the MGSA system is the ampere, defined as a rate of flow of one coulomb per second. The current density (j) is defined as the current passing through a unit cross-sectional area of lhe cO'ld'lctor. The practical unit of current density is the ampere,em', i,e., a current of one ampere through an area of I crn 2 perpendicular to the direction of flow. The current density is
j=neu, (423) where n is the number of charge carriers in unit volume, e - the charge of a carrier, and v - the mean veloci ty of the carriers. If there are charges of different sign and magnitude present, the total current density will be equal to the sum of the densities due to lhe difIerent kinds of charges j=~nev.
(4,24)
The following relation also holds (. aE,
B. TlfE ELECTRIC CURRENT. DIRECT-CURRENT CIRCUITS FUNDAMENTAL CONCEPTS AND LAWS
1. Electric Current in Metals The orderlv motion of
charge
carriers
constitutes
an
electric current. In metals the charge carriers are electronsnegatively charged particles whose charge is equal .to t.he e:ementary charge. The direction of the c~rrent.ls arlJltranly defined as the direction opposite to that 1TI whIch the negative charges move. If a charge !'.. q passes through a cross-section of a conductor in a time from to to to M then the current at. t~e instant to (or thit instantaneous current) IS defined as the I1mlt
+
i1o = lim M
-7 0
~q t
.
(4,22)
In a
(4,2:))
where E is the electric field intensily in,ide the conductor, ond a is the conductivity of tlte condclctor (see beIO\\). The current is a scalar quantity, lhe current density -- a vector quanli ty. For an electric current to flow in a closed circuit there must be forces other than electroslalic forces acting on the charge carriers. Any device wllich gives t: rise to such forces is called a current source or electric generator. An electric circuit is composed of a current source, connecting wires and instruments (or other deVices) in which the current performs work (Fig. 38). Work in an electric circuit is performed by forces of a non-electrostatic nature which keep Fig. 3K. Simple Up a constanl potential differ:Ollce across eleelric circuit. the terminals of lhe source. The electromotive force (e.m.f.) of a source of electric energy is detined as the work done in carryins unit electric charge around a closed circuit in whi h no current is flolVing. The electromotive fcrce is measured n the ,;ame units as the potential diiIerence ([or examp!e, n volts).
ti
108
CH. IV. ELECTRICITY
FUNDAMENT AL CONCEPTS AND LAWS
Ohm's law for a section of a circuit which does not contai n electromotive forces was es tab I ished by experi menta I observation: the current in a conductor is proportional to the potellt ia/ diljerence uetu.!een ils ends, i.e.,
. U 1=
IT'
The enn:";:)'lt of proportionality in this law
(4,26)
I
R
where p is the resistivity, defined as the res;st3nce of a conductor of unit length and unit cross-sectional area. I is the length of the conductor, and 5 - the cross-sectional area. The quantity
a=+
is called the conductivity. The unit of
resistivity in the MKSA system is the ohm m. In electrical engineering I is expressed in m, the cross-sectional area 5 - in mm 2 ; hence p is expressed in ohm mm 2 jm 2
mm 1 ohm - - = lOG ohm m. m
The resistivity of most metals increases with the temper. ature. The dependence of the resistiVity on the temperature can be represented approximately by the relation Pt=Po (1
+ at)
by 1°C to the initial resistivity. The resistivity of some metals at very low temperatures drops suddenly and becomes practically zero. This phenomenon is called superconductivity. When resistors are connected in series the equivalent resistance RI:. is equal to the sum of the separate resistances
R l , R2 , R., ... R n :
is called
the conductance. The quantity R is called the resistance; it depends on the "fricUon" which the charge carriers must overcome in their motion throL1[;h the medium. Conductors in which current is due to the Illotion of free electrons are called e/3ctronic conductors. The unit of resistance is the ohm. 1 ohm is the resistance of a conductor having a difference of potential between its ends equal to 1 vol! \vhen a current of 1 ampere flows through it. The resistance of a wire conductor (of constant crosssection) is I R==c-- , (4,27) '5
.
109
(4,29) For resistors connected in parallel: 1 1 1 1 1 ~=--+-+-+"'+-R R~
where Pt is the resistivity at the temperature t, 20- the resistivity at uoe, and a - the temperature coefficient of resistivitlJ; this coefficient is numerical1y equal to the ratio of the change in resistivity caused by heating the conductor
R.
n
.
(4,30)
Ohm's law ,for a section ot a circuit containing e.m.[. For a section of a circuit containing an e.m.1. the following relation, called Ohm's law, holds:
.
U+~
(4,31)
t=-R--'
\vnere R is the resistance of the section, U - the potential difference oetween the ends of the section, and ~ - the e.m.L It should be borne in mind that both 10 and U may ue posi tive or negative. The e.m.1. is. considered positive if it increases the potential III the dIrectIon of current flow (the current flows from the .solUce negative terminal to the positive terminal itli + J OJ of the ..source):. the p.otential differe.~.ce is I II considered poslhve if the current l11slde t the source flows in the direction of de- Ii - 1 / 8 creasin a potential (from the positive to the ne.gative terminal). For .exa~p;e, in charging an accumulator (FIg. 09) the charging current I + U @ ~
E.
I
-
(4.28)
R2
Rl
l') oee
~cr{!i'e biJllerp
Race Fig. ~-)~). l\rCUnlUwhere U is the potential difference across lator charging cir· the terminals of the source, ~acc - the t..'ui t. e.m.1. of the accnmulator being charged, Race - the resistance of the accumulator (the reSIstance of the connecting wires is neglected).
110
CH. IV. ELECTRICITY
FUNDAMENTAL CO"CEPTS j\ND Lj\WS
For the section of the circuit ADB we have in the same case .
~ ~our('e -
First law: the algebraic sum of the currents flowing into a junction (or branch point) is zero. For example (Fig. 40),
U
tCh=·7~s~.~
i,
where &3curce is the e.m.f. of the source, and RSOUL'C - its internal resistance. For a closed unbranc:hed circuit the relation (4,31) takes on the form (in this case U=O)
.
$
t=R'
(4,32)
where R is the sum of the resistance of the external circuit and the internal resistance of the source. Work of electric current. The work performed by an electric current in a section of a circui t is
A=iUI,
(4,33)
where I is the time of flow of the current, U - the potential difference across the section, and i -- the current. The work performed by a current which appears as a change in the internal energy of the conductor (heat) in the absence of an e.m.!. in the section of the circuit is U2 A=7[t. (4,34)
A=i"Rt.
(4,35)
The unit of work (or energy) in electrical engineering is the walt·second, or joule, defined as the work performed when a direct current of 1 amp Ilows through a potential difference of 1 v in I sec. Another practical unit of work is the kilowatt-hour (kw-hr). 1 kw-hr=3.6x 10 6 watt-sec. Kirchhoff's laws. The calculation of currents, potential difierences and e.m.f.'s in complex circuits is carried out On the basis of Kirchhoff's laws_
+i +i 2
3 -
i.,=0
Second law: the algebraic sum of the products of the currents by the respective resistances around a closed loop is equal to the algebraic sum of the e.m.f.'s in the loop. To apply this law to a loop we consider those currents as positive whose direction coincides with an arbitrary direction around the loop. An e.mJ. is considered positive if the arbitrary direction around the loop coincides with the 'llirec/iollolrderellce direction of the e.m.f. of tLe current source (the e.mJ. uf a current source is directed from the negative terminal to
', X
. '?
IJ
Fig.
40.
;:.~ EJ
I •.
Currcnt
J
Fig ..\ I. Currcnl Lop.
junction.
the positive). For example (Fig. 41),
i,R, The work performed by a current which appe3rs as a change in the internal energy of the conductor (regard less of whether the section of the circuit includes an e.m.f. or not) is
III
+i R 2
2 -
i3 R,=G>1
+ $2 -
$3'
For simi lar sources connected in series i (nr"
+ R)=ny/;,
(4,36)
where n is the number of sources, r ll - the internal resistance of a source, R - the external resistance, i9 - the e.mJ. of a source. For n similar sources connected in parallel i ( R
+ ~~ )=;;1.
(4,37)
2. Current in Electrolytes Solutions of acids. bases and salts in water or in ether solvents are called electrolytes. Molten salts are also characterised by electrolytic conductivity. The current in electrolytes is carried by ions which are formed when the substance
FUNDAMENTAL CONCEPTS AND LAWS
CH. IV. ELECTRICITY
112
passes into solution. Ions are positively or negatively char[',ed parts of molecules. The current density due to ions of both signs is (4,38)
where n+ is the concentration of positive ions, e - the ~harge of an ion, V+ - the drift velocity of the positive Ions, n_, v _ - the concentration and drift velocity of the negative ions. the mobility of the ions is defined as the average drift velocity which an ion attains in a field of intensity 1 v/cm. The current density can be expressed in terms of the ion mobilities u+ and u_: (4,30)
Ohm's law holds for electrolytes. The decomposition of an electrolyte by an electric currcnt is called electrclysis. Faraday's 1irst law. The mass of any substance liberated at the electrode in electrolysis is proportional to the total quantity of charge Q passing through the electrolyte:
m=KQ.
(4,40)
The coefficient of proportionality K is called the electrochemical equivalent and is equal numerically to the mass of a given substance liberated when unit quantity of chilrge . passes through the electrolyte. Faraday's second law. The electrochemical equivalent of a given substance is proportional to its chemical eqUivalent: (4,41) WRei'e
yA -
the chemical eqUivalent is defined as the ratio
of the atomic weight of an element to its valence. The constant C is the same for all substances and has the dimensions g/g-equiv. The faraday. The same quantity of electric charge, equal to 96,500 coulombs, when p:,ssed throu<;(h a solution of au electrolyte, will liberate a mass of substance equal to the chemica I cquivalent of that substance. This quantity of electric charge is C
F =96,500 coul/g-equiv; C=ljF g-equiv/coul.
113
(4,42)
Electrochemical cells. When a metal electrOde is immersed in an electrolyte a potential difference is set up between the electrode and the solution. This potential difference is called the electrochemical potential of the given electrode in the given solution. The absolute normal potential is called the value of the electrochemical potential of a m21al in a solution with a normal concentration of ions (i.e., with a concentration of one gram-equivalent of ions per liter). Under such conditions the electrochemical potential depends only on the nature of the metal. When. two. c:lectrodes are immersed in an electrolyte a.potentIal dltterence is set up between them, equal to the dl.Herence of. their electrochemical potentials. An electrolyte with tWD dl()erent electrodes immersed in it is called an electrochemical cell (for example, a solution of sulfuric acid with a copper and a zinc plate immersed in it is called a Volt alc cell). . 3. Current in Gases The passage of electric current through a gas is due to the presence of ions and free electrons. Electrons may become detached from neutral gas molecules and some of them may attach themselves to olher neu tra 1 molecu les and atoms. This process is called ionisatio/l. The energy reqUired to remove an elec! ron from d molecule or atom is called the ionisation potentia! and is expressed in electron-volts (ev). An elecl:,1l1-volt IS equal to the energy acqUired by an electron 111 fallIng through a potential difference of 1 volt. . The cur.rent density in gases., as in metals and liquids, IS determ1l1ed by the concenlralion of the charge carriers (ions), their mobility and charge. However in view of the fact that. the ion concentration depends on the Held intensity and vanes throughout the volume of gas, Ohm's law does not apply, as a rule, to gaseous conductors. Two kinds of conductivity are distingUished in gases: induced conductiVity, when ioni:;alion is caused by agents other than an electric 1ield (for example, X-rays, heating, etc.); and tntrtnsic conductivity, when ionisation is due to the action of an electric field applied between the electrodes.
114
FUNDAMENTAL CONCEPTS AND LAWS
CH. IV. ELECTRICITY
l'
115
It f thea ca~e
An electric current in vacuum (101: example, in thermionic tubes) is due to the motion of electrons or ions which escape from electrodes placed in a vacuum. In order to remove an electron from a metal work must be performed; this is known as the work function. When a metal is heated it begins to emit electrons. This phenomenon is called thermionic emission. An electron can escape from the metal if the following condition is fulfilled:
of large flat electrodes the breakdown pot enor d given gas and ele~trode material depends only un • e pro uTt pd (where p IS the pressure of the gas. and ~ - the d.stance b~tween the electrodes). In other words 1 p ~nd d are vaned in such manner that their prcdwt remalIlS . constant, the breakdown potential will not chana; The distance between. the. e.lectrodes at which breakdu~~ ~~curl at a given potential dlfterence is called the spark crap d'ffe ength tof the spark gap is a measure of the pote;tiai J erence b e ween the electrodes.
1 2 "2 mv ll ?,:
4. Semiconductors
t~a
(4,43)
where m is the mass of the electron, v ll - the projection of the thermal velocity of the electron on to the normal to the surface, and
is SJ:i~on~~ctor\~re substances whme electrical conductivity . . 0 e mo Ion of bou~d electrons and whose resist~VI\~. at room teJ.llperature lIes within the range from 10- 2 ms cm. 1he resistiVity of semiconductors is stroncrly to e~~~r~ ure-dependent. In contradistinction to metals the f~~ISt~vlty of semiconduc~ors. decreases with an incre2~e in stronglyperattuhre. The reslst!vlty of semiconductors depends on e presence of Impurities.
°r
(4,44)
.,
where A' is a constant which is different for different met· als, T - the absolute temperature, k -' Boltzmann's con· stant (see p. 58) and e ~ 2.72 is the base of the natural loga· rithms. The quantities A' and
Fig.. 42. Electron energy level dIagram of scrniconduetor.
Electrons in matter are distributed about the atomic in such manner that any atom may po 1 a dls.crete s~t of energy values. Every electron c~~e~c~uIl~Y certam defiIllte energy levels, which are different from- t~l~ enen5Y levels of other electrons. These energy levels dre called c:llowed levels. The allowed energy levels fall . I two .reglOns, or band~, .which are separated by the s~.ca\?:~~ forb~dden gap contalIllng the values of elll'rgv which a;c forbidden to t.he electron. At the temperature"(PK :ill th,' electrons are !n the band ~f lowest cuclgil':i. and all (h~ energy: levels 1Il thiS iJ:l1ld will he occupied (Fig. 42). This band IS called the valencG band The .ecoml baud (the connuc~ei
8*
116
CH. IV. ELECTRICITY
duction band) of the non-metallic elements does not contain a single electron at O"K. In metals the conduction and the valence bands overlap. The energy required for an electron to pass from the valence band to the conduction band is called the width of the forbidden gap PEn). Semiconductors possess either electron (n-type) or hole (p-type) conductivity. Electronic conductivity is due to the motion of the electrons in the conduction band; hole conductivity is due to electrons in the valence band moving from one atom to another which has "lost" an electron to the conduction band. The motion of an electron in the valence band is eqUivalent to the motion of a positive charge in the opposite direction. Such a positive charge is termed a "hole".
TABLES AND GRAPHS for light ra~n - 10-" to 10-:-' CGSE units of current'cm' ,·'t tll11 S
thunde! storms : and ! hail - UI' 3x 10-'. C'GSE' renftorre m , ' to ,
ET=a (T 1
-
The quantity a is called the di(Jerential thermal e.m.f. (or the coefficient of the thermal e.m.!.); it is numerically equal to the thermal e.m.!. developed per degree centigrade.
[ cur-
Table 69 Resistivity and Tempe ra t ure Coe ftl· clent of ResistiVity of Metals Metal
T 2 )·
0
The current in a lightning stroke mo,' I . . (the most common values are '[rom 20 "<)0 let .1.S1 high
5. Thermoelectricity If a closed circuit is composed of two dissimi lar metals and the junctions of the metals are maintained at different temperatures, a current will flow in the circuit. This current may be attributed to a thermal e.m.f. developed at the junctions, and the phenomenon itself is called the thermoelectric e(Ject. Within a certain temperature range the magnitude of the thermal emf. is approximately proportional to the temperature difference. In this case
117
Aluminium Brass . . • Chromi um Copper
Iron . . . Lead " Mercury Molybdenum Nickel .. Phosphor bronze Silver . . . Tantalum. Tin . . . . Tungsten . Zinc . • • . . . . . . . . . . . . .
I(csistivity at :!(PC ohm mm;jm
00210 0.025·0.00 0.027 0.0 i 75 0.098 0.221 O. ~)58
0.057 0.100
0.015 0.0 I 0 o .155
0.115 0.055 O.05~
Temperature coefficient
at
~occ
0,0049 0.OCi2·0.00 7 (J.()039 0.0002 () ,0011 (1.0009 0.0033 0.0050
0.0040 0.003G 0.0031 0.0012 0.0045 0.0035
TABLES AND GRAPHS
Electric Currents and the Earth's Atmosphere JverI.• (due to the motion of positive and negative ions in the atmosphere) is The experimentally measurad density of the vertical current jvert:.--:..:2~<10-t(j amp/cm
2
•
The density of lie ('mrents due to tbe Illotion 01 charged raindrops, snowflakes and bail is:
Note. The valucs given in the table are average values' for cliffe
~~~t samples they depend on the degree of purity. the;rnal' treatment: to nke7~~6erat,!re coefficient of resistivity of pme metals is cl05e exp,;nsi 0-;;- 0'log2le:: I.e.. to t he val ue of the ceJefli ci ent of t herma]
j! \)
TABLES AND dRAPES 118
CH. IV. ELECTRICITY
Table 71
Table 70 Transition Temperatures to the Supercondueting state for Some Metals Substance
1>1 etals Zirconi um Cadmium Zinc Aluminium Uranium Tin Mercury Tantalum Lead Niobium
ITranSitiOn temperatu- II re, 0 K.
0.3 0.6 0.8 1.2 1.3 3.7 4.1 4.4 7.3 9.2
A!lo!J s
Bi -pt Pb·- Au Sn _. Zn Pb -Eg.
,
0.16 2.0-7.3 3.7 4.1-7.3
Substance
Sn - Hg. Pb -J\.g. Pb -Sb. Pb -Ca
I
Transi lion temperature, oK
Alloys
4.2 5.8-7.3 6.6 7.0
(58.8% Constantan Cu, 40% Ni, 1.2% Mn) Fechral (80% Fe, 14 'It, Cr, 6% AI) . . . . . German silver (65% CU.20%Zn,15%Ni) Mangani n (85% Cu, 12% Mn, 3% Ni) Nickeline (54% Cu, 20% Zn. 26% Ni) Nichrome (67.5% Ni, 15% Cr, 16% Fe. 1.5% Mn) (84% Cu, Rheostan 12% Mn, 4% Zn) •
COIl/pounds
Ki Hi PbSe SrDi, KbB MoC
Nb 2 C NbC. J\bN V,Si. J\b,Sn.
Alloys of High Ohmic Resistance
4.2 5.0 5.5 6 7.6-8.3 9.2 10.1-10.5 15-16 17.1 18
, Notes. 1. There are a number "f ,uperconducling alloys containing a greater number of components: I(ose's metal (8.5°K), Newton's metal (8.5 C K), Wood's metal (8.2°K), Pb - As - Bi (90 0 K), Pb - As- Bi -Sb (9.6°K)· 2. Upon transition to the superconducling state the resistivity of compounds and alloys varies throughout a wide range of temperatures (sometimes as wide as 2°K). In addition the transition temperature depends on the heat treatment of the alloy or compound. In such cases the table indicates the bounds within which the transition temperat ure Ii es,
Resi sti vity at 20°C, ohm mm 2 /rn
Temperature coefficient (in the range 0-100°C)
Maximum operating temperature, °C
0.00001
500
0.0001
900
0.44-0.52 1.1-1.3 0.28-0.35
0.00004
150-200
0.42-0.48
0.00003
100
0.39-0.45
0.00002
150-200
I. 0-1. I
0.0002
1,000
0.45.0.52
0.0004
150-200
Note. The value ot the temperature coefficient of resistance of constantan varies from --0.00004 to +0.00001 depending on the sample. The minus sign before the temperature coefficient denotes that the resistance decreases with increasing temperature.
Table 72 Allowed Current-Carrying Capacity of Insulated Wires for Prolonged Operation (amp)
~. area, mm 2
1
1.5
2.5
4
6
10
i4 \1
20 16 8
25 20 10
31 24
43 34 17
16
25
75 60 30
100 80
Material
Copper . , Aluminium Iron.
11 8 -
-
12
II
-
CH. IV. ELECTRICITY
120
Table 73
~~l~
~esistivity of Electrolytes at 18°C and Different
Concentrations (see Fig. 43) Concenlra-
Solute
tion.
%
!
Tem perature coefficient. x (degree-I)
Ammon! um chloride, NH.Cl
5 10 20
10.9
5.6 3.8
0.0198 0.0186 0.0161
Copper sulfate, CuSO,
5 10 17.5
52.D 31.5 23.8
0.0216 0.0218 0.0236
Hydrochloric acid, HCI
5 20 40
2.0 1.3 I.D
0.0158 0.0154
Nitric acid, HN03
10 20 30 40
2. I 1.5 1.3 1.1
0.0145 0.0137 0.0139 0.0150
Sodium clilori de, NaCI (com man sall)
5 10 20
14.D 8.3
5.1
0.0217 0.0214 0.0716
;).1 3.2 3.0 8.3
0.0201 0.0217. o .0299 0.0648
4.8 1.5 1.1
1.5
0.0121 0.0145 0.0162 0.0178
52.4 31.2 21.2
0.0225 0.0223 0.0243
Sodium hydroxide. NaOH
5 10 20 10
~t\
o~ /C
Fig.
Zinc sulfate, ZnSO,
5 20 30 40
10 20
20
43.
t
YO 40 50';;-·---=jC;;O......,7.t: ... O.......,gf:. O.......,gf:.O,... COllce;;/;-c//oJ1, % ,
ConcenLr<.iUoll dependence
of resistivity qf aqueous 0olutioll of H,SO,.
Table 74 Thermal Electromotive Force of Some Metal Couples in Millivolts Junction tem-l Plati num, platinum perature, °C with 10% rhodi LIm
-200
lOa
Sulfuric acid, H,SO,
121
TABLES AND GRAPHS
-
Note. The resistivity of electrolyle falls off with increasing temperature (as distinct from metals): The resistivity for other lemperatures Pt can be computed from the formula (compare with (4,25)): P =?IR[I -x (t-18)]. where x is the temperature coefiieient given i~ the table, 0,< - the resistivity at 18°C, t - the temperature for which the resistivitY!t is sought.
200 300 40 a 500 (jO 0 700
ROO 1,000 1,500
I
Iron,
Copper.
constantan
constantan
R O.li!
1.44 2.32 :1.25 4.22 5.22 G.2li 7.33 9.57 15.50
5 11 16 2:2
27 33
5.5 I 9
15 21
~j9
Iii 58
Note. The temperature of the 1'o[or,,,,,'o junction is kept at
O'c.
122
CH. IV. ELECTRICITY
TABLES AND GRAPHS
Table 75 Differential Thermal e.m.f. (:1) with Respect to Platinum at oDe Metal
Antimony Bismuth . Constantan
",
Metal
p.v/degree
7.4 16.0 -16.4
Copper
47.0 -65.0 -34.4
Iron
Nickel
Table 76 Electrochemical Equivalents
-,
p.v/degree
Note. The minus signs indicate that the current In the hot junction flows from the metal with the smaller algebraic value of ... For example, in the thermocouple copper·constantan (Fig. 44) the current in the hot junction flows !rom constantan to copper.
123
Ion
H+
I
Gram chemical equivalent
K, mg/coul
1.008
Ion
Gram chemical equivalent
K, mg/coul
I 0.0104
CO;-
30.0
0.3108
0-Al++ + OH-
8.0 9.0 17.0
0.0829 0.0936 0.1762
Cu++ Zn++
Cl-
31.8 32.7 35.5
0.3297 0.3387 o .3672
Fe++ +
18.6
0.1930
SO 4 - -
48.0
0.4975
20.1
0.2077
0.642
0.2388 0.2895
NO; Cu+ Ag+
62.0
23.0 27.8
63.6 107.9
0.l\590 1.118
Note. The number of pIllS or minus signs In the superscript denotes the number of elementary charges carried by one ion.
Table 77
/0 '\
o
lOO
.iOO
';'00
Absolute Normal Potentials of Some Metals
1100 tot. ,I
Fig. 44. Temperature dependence of difjerential thermal e.m.f. of copper·constantan thermocouple.
Metal
Cadmium Chromium Copper Iron Lead
I
Normal poten·11 hal, v
-0.13 -0.29 0.61 -0.17 0.15
Metal
Manganese Mercury Nickel Silver Zinc
INormal patential, v
-1.28 I. 13 0.04 I. 07 ·-0.50
TABLES AND GRAPHS
124
125
CH. IV. ELECTRICITY
Charging and Discharging Accumulators
Table 78 e.m.f. of Electrochemical Cells Name of cell
Negative clec t rode
Posi ti ve eleel rode
Daniell
Zinc
Copper
Solution
e.m.f.. v
Di fferent solutions at electrodes: zinc immersed in solution of slIlfuri c acid (5-10%); copper immersed in saturated solution of copper sulfate CuSO,
1.1
a)
Edison
Powdered i rOll (or cadmium mixed \vi th i rOil
20(%
J'\ickcl
solution
Z5 2.4 "'2.2.
~
~2..0
~
::;;: 1.8
1.4-1.1
of
potassium hydroxide (KOH)
dioxide
Zinc
Carbon
Lead accumulator
Spongy lead
Lead peroxide PbO,
Lec1anche
Zinc
Carbon
Solu ti on of salammoniac, manganese peraxi de wi th powdered carbon
1.46
Lec1anche (dry)
Zinc
Carbon
1 1 3 2
part ZnO. part KH,CI. parts gypsum. parts ZnC!, and water until a paste is formed
1.3
Zinc
Silver
Sollltion of si urn hydroxi de
Cadmium amalgam
27 - 2K % solution of H,SO" free from chlori nc, density 1.20
I
POLlS-\
I Mercury
2.01
12 parts K,Cr,O,. 25 parts I-IzSO h 100 parts If,O 1
1
Weston, normal
I {}
0.5
I
1.5
2.
i ..'
T/.r;;..D,J
Grenet
oxi de
f.O
/.4
oxide:;)
SI lver-zi nc accumulator
leM O'CCI/l7lI//iJ/or
2.8
2.0-1.9 at 15°C
1.5
(KOll)
Saturated solution of CdSO,. pas te of Ilg,SO, and CdSO,
1. 0183
J
.1.5
"
't.5 5
126
CH. IV. ELECTRICITY
TABLES AND GRAPHS
127
Table 79
Table 81
Mobility of Ions in Aqueous Solutions at 18°e Mobility, cm 2 ,'sec v
Anions
Mobility, cm 2 /sec v
Na+
0.003263 0.000669 0.000450
OHCiNO.-
0.00180 0.00068 0.00062
Ag+
0.00056
S04
0.00068
2n++
0.00048 0.00046
Cations
Mobility of Ions in Gases at 760 mm Hg and zooe (in cm 2 jsec v)
Gas H+
K+
Fa+++
CO;-
0.00062
Notes. I. Cations are positively charged. anions - negatively charged ions. 2. The ionic mobility increases approximately 2% per 1°C Increase In temperature. 3. The number of plus or minus signs in the superscripts Indicates the number of elementary charges carried by one ion.
Posi ti ve ion mobility
Negative ion mobility
1. 36
I. 87
1. 37 1. 37 0.76 5.09 6.3 1. 36
l. 51 I. 70 0.81 6.31 8.1 1.8
Air, dry . Air. saturated wi th water vapour Argon Ca rbon di oxi de Helium. Hydrogen . Oxygen .
Notes. I. The values of the mobili ty are given for the case of Ionisation by X·rays. 2. The mobility of ions in gases decreases with a rise in pressure and increases wi th the temperature.
Table 82 Table 80
Ionisation Potentials (in Electron-Volts)
Mobility of Electrons in Metals (in cmz/sec v) Ionisation process
MObility·····I 56/48144135130) 19/ 10 1 7 . 9 [5.8
Note. The field intensity inside metals actually does not exceed 0.001 v!cm; hence, the electron velocities will be numerically much smaller than the values of the mobility given in the table. This can easily be verified by means of the relation (4,23) by inserting thl! permissible values of the current density given in Table 72.
He Ne N2 Ar
-> He+ -> Ne+ -> N+2
-> Ar+ -> If; N --+N+ CO 2 -> CO; Kr -> Kr+
If,
I
Ionisation potential
Ionisation process
Ionisation potential
24.5 21.5 15.8 15.7 15.4 14.5 14.4 13.9
H -> H+ 0->0+ H"O -> H 2 O+ Xc -> Xe+ 0, -> 0; Hg -> Hg+ Na->Na+
13.5 13.5 13.2 12.8 12.5 10.4 5.1 4.3
I
K -> K+
~
TABLES AND GRAPHS
CH. IV. ELECTRICITY
128
129
Table 83
Table 86
Emission Constants of Some Metals and Semiconductors ~,
Element
ev
amp N,
i
C1ll2
dCg'rec2
II
Element
Aluminium
3.74
I"ickcl
Antimony
.:2.35 2.29 1.89 4.51 4.47
'Seleuium. iSilicon . . !Tcllurium
Barium Cesium.. Chromium Copper . . Germanium
lCiO 48
4.5() 4. ~H) 4.27
Iroll MolylH1cnul11
GO
I
..
4.84
iPlatinum'.
5.29 4.72 4.10 1.12 3.41
iT1JOri urn iTin... jTungsten IUrallium
-
N, amp
ev
cm:l degree
Substance 30 32
B C -graphite C - diamond Si Ge Sn. gray S Se, gray
70
4.11
60-100
4.50
~L74
Note. The work function depends markedly on the cJeanli ness of the surface and sped mens.
011
Properties of Most Important Semiconductors (see a Iso Figs. 46-49)
impurities. The figures in the table are for pure
Te I
Emission Constants of films on Metals
B~Tc~
PbSe ZnTe PbS AgBr CdTe Cu.,O AI;O,I ZnO
N,
Film
Tuuf(sten
Molybdenum
I', ev
amp cm 2 degree 2
1 .56 2.63 2.84 1.36 :J. 14 2.58 2.52
Barium Thari u m Uranium Cesium Lircollium TllOrlUm
Tantalum
1.5 3.0 3.2 3.2 5.0 1.5 0.5
-----------------'-------------Table 85 Emission Constants of Oxide-Coated Cathodes N, Cathode
Barium on nxidisccl tungsten
Nickcl- jJ"O - Sr 0 Barium -PI-Ni; BaO
O!l iJ
-- tt~Jl;:_C-;l(~11 --:->1'0 . . . . Jlil"kc} :J1loy
Thori um oxi de~coa ted (';\ t hade (meall value)
cv
amp cm:.l degree 2
I. I 0 1.20 I. :31 1 . :,7
0.3 0.96 0.18 2.45 0.OS7-2.18
~,
1 ';)1).\ .8:J 2.59
4.35
---~-----'------
I. \ 0.1 G-7 1.12 0.75 0.IJ8 2.4 2.3 0.:3(; 1.3 O. 17 0.2 0.25 0.3Ci
-
1 ,4 I 4 958 I 13 220
452
Mg2Sn
Element
Width of forbidden gap. ev
2,300
1 1:3 . .5 Do;) li70 585 778 1,OGS I ,240 1,1 14 4 :JO I 1045 1,2:J2
Ag,Te HgTe
Table 84
Melti ng poi nt, °C
2,050
Electron mobility, cm:!/sec
10
-
I
U.S O.G 1.2 1 .35 J .45 1.5-1. 8
1,975
2.5 3.2
I
1,800 1,90IJ 3,900 3,000 1,700 :!5 4,00IJ 10,000 600 200 1,400 IIJ() 650 35 450 .200
V
Hole mobility, cm 2/sec V
10
-
J ,200 500 1,900
-
--
1,200 100 150 150 1,400 800
-
\00 100 -
-
Notes. I. The values of the mobilities are given for room temperature and field intensities less than the critical field. Deviations from Ohm's law may occur, due to the field-depen_ dence of the mobility. The least intensity for which such deviations are Observed is called the critical field (Ecr)' At i=20°C the critical field in n-type p-type n- type p- type
germanium germanium si Ii con si Ii con
E cr =900 v/cm E cr =I,400 v,cm E cr =2,500 v!cm E cr =7,500 v:cm
The critical field decreases wfth decreasing temperature. 2. The wi dth 01 tbe forbi dden gap ill metals is of the order of 0.1 ev; ill dielectrics _ over 10 ev.
9
~1aK.
4,1)
CH. IV. ELEClRICITY
130
FUNDAMENTAL COXCEPTS AKD LAWS
131
SF!'e
PHe
~
__~ ..--.J
tl
]0 't--+-J-~J 1001L--~'---I!---l
100
T'K
JOO
200
j&"O--2Ju' - ~-JJO
N
~
FiiT. 49. Differential thermal e.m.f. versus lCll1!'C'ratlllc: a) Iced lelluride (upper C'urve--concentration of impuril"y
JO'~:---::o.oJ..'O-f--O-lOO-Z--Ij--!" 'g Fig. 46. Dependence of resistivity p on 1iT for intrinsic semiconductor, the
Fig. 47. Temperature dependellce of resistivi tv 01 g,,-'11Il
\&alues of p are plotted .on
the ordinate axi s on a garithmic scale.
10-
number of germ ani urn atoms, N - r.um 1.:ET of antimony Su atoms.
L.l
2
"~
Table 87 Spark Gaps for Air at 760 mm Hg (in mm)
~
Form of ~. ~clectrodes Potenti ill _______________
di fference, v
_______________
20,000 40.000 !OO,1I01l 2110,000 301l,OIJO
, II-Ip~;;::: ~jJ-llfjJe
~
TO/(
Two
Two spheres
\,oi Iltcd
of di<.ll1lciL'r
wires
1 S. 5
,I;) . .5
5
('Ill
;).
41
1J 4S 2li2
GOO
530
Two plates
G.1 1:l. 7
3G.7 75.3 It4
~
"<:::~
"\ ".~ t\. "\ ~ ~
Fig'. 48. De. pendence of resistivity of germani um (10·
/I-Ip)/~~~ 0-
'P-I)jJ~ '\ ~
,
"::: 10
]e
02
10."
1It/lllbor OI/1l7;Jl/l'Ily
I(J
'I.
10
010117$ jJl?r CIlI J
"
~" ~
wer curves) and 5i Ii con (upper Curves) 011 concen tra. Ii on of i m purl ty atoms. Tempe'rat ure--aboul 20°C.
~
ELECTROMAGNETISM
FUNDAMENTAL CONCEPTS AND LAWS
1. The Magnetic Field. Magnetic Induction If a freely pivoted magnetic needle is placed near a wire carrying current, the needle will be deflected (will Le oriented in a certain direction). The forces causing this deflection are called magnetic forces.
CP. IV. ELECTRICITY
132
FUNDAMENTAL CONCEPTS AND LAWS
A region of space in which magnetic forces act is called
a magnetic field. . A magnetic J1eld docs not act upon electric charges at res t. The direC"iiol1 of the magnelic field is defined as the dire~ tion of the force actin;:; on the north pole of a magnetic needle placed at the given point of the field. The force act ing on a wire carrying current in a magnetic field is determined by Ampere's law: F = ilB sin ~,
(4,45)
where I is the 1cn,~th of the wire, ~ - the angle between the direction of the magnetic fie Id and the current in the wire; i, and 13 are expressed in the same system of units. The quantity in equation (4,45) characterises the magnitude and direction of the magnetic field and is called the magnetic induction. The magnetic induction is numerically equal to the force which the fnagnclic field exerts up'in unit length of a straight wire carryin7, unit current when the wire is perpendicular to t he field. The li1agnetic induction is a vector quantity. Its direction coincides with the direction of the magnetic field. The magnetic induction depends on the properties of the medium. The magnetic field surrounding a current-carrying wire can also be characterised by another quantity, called the field intensitl! (Ii). The field intensity i" independent of the properties of the medium; it is determined by' the current and the shape of the conductor. . B The quanhty l-"=H charac-
n
Fi~.
;;u. LcH-.!land rule.
terises the magnetic properties of the medium and is called the permeability ot the medium. The direction of the force acting on a current-carrying conductor is determined by means of the left-hand rule: if the open palm at the left hand is placed so that the lines of force of the magnetic field enter the palm, while the outstretched
133
fingers point in the direction of the current, then the thumb will indicate the direction of the force actin:.; on the conductor (Fig. 50). Two sufficiently long straight parallel conductors of the same length I carrying currents i, and i 2 , respectively, interact with a force F -
-
2ftiJ2 1 a '
(4,46)
where a is the distance hetween the conductors and It is the permeabi Ii ty of the medi Lim. Currents flowing in the same direction attract, currents flowing in opposite directions repel each other. The force acting on a moving charge in a magnetic Held (called Lorentz' force) is
(4,4.7) where e is the charge, v-the velocity and a-the angle between the direction of the velocitv and the indtlction 13.1 he Lorentz force is directed perpend(cu lar to the p lane determined by the vectors B and v. 2. CGSM and 1VI/(5A Systems cf Units In the CGS electromagnetic (CGSM) system t:Je fundamental units are the centimetre, [f,mm (mass), second, and for electric quantities -- the pl'rmeal:ility. The permeability of vacLium (flo = I) is taken as the l111it of permeability. The unit of current in this system is derived [rom the law of interaction of currents (4,46). The unit of curren tin the CGS,'Vl svs tern is defined as such a direct current which, when fJo\\'in~g throl.gh t\\'o infinitely long parallel wires placed in vacuum I cm apart, causes them to interact with a force of 2 dynes per em of their length. It is assumed that both \1 ires have a sufficiently small cross-sectional area. The fundamental units of the MKSA svste!l~ are the meter, kilowam (mass), second and the unit o'r current ---a:ilpere. An ampere j,; defined as sl!ch a direct cllrJl'nt wllich when flOWing tlIrollgh two inl1nitely IOllg pilralil'l wires placed in vacuum at a distance of one meier caLl:"~, thelll to Interact with a force of 2X 10- 7 M.l\SA units of force per meter of their length.
135
CH. IV. ELECTR ICfTY
FUNDAMEJ\TAL CONCEPTS AND LAWS
In this system the permeability is a derived quantity. For vacuum fto= 10- 7 henry/meter.
by an element of conductor of length I1l carrying a current i is (Flg. 53) !J.H_i!J.1 sin a (4,48)
134
The unit of magnetic field intensity in the CGSl\1. system is the oersted; in the 1'v1KSA system - the ampere per meter, (amp/m). An oersted is defined as the intensity of a magnetic field which acts on 1 cm of a straight conductor carrying 1 CGSM unit of current with a force of 1 dyne. 1 amp/m = 10- 3 oersted. The unit of magnetic induction in the CGSl\1. svstem is the
gauss; in the MKSA system - the u.'eber per square meter (weber/ m 2). 3. I ntensity of the Magnetic Fields of Currents The lines of force of a magnetic field are defined as curves, the iangents to which coincide in directlon with the intensity at each point. The ma~netic lines of force are closed curves (as distinct from the lines of force of an electrostatic field); such fields are called vortical iields. The lines of force of a straight currentcarrying conductor are concentric circles lying in a p lane perpendicular to the current (Fig. 51). The direction of the magnetic Fig. 51. Magneli c Ii nes of force of a line" of force is determined straig-ht \Vi re carrying current, pat~ by the right -hand rule. tern formed by iron fili ngs. If the thumb of the right hand is p laced a long the wire pointing in the direclion of the current, the curled fingers of the right hand will point in the direction of the magnetic lines of force. (Figs. 51, 52 and 53). Fig. 52. fr\:\gnctic field flue to curThe intensity of the rent in a solenoid, pattern formed magnetic field generated by iron Ii lings,
-
,2
,
where r is the distance from the eleme,;.t !J.I to the point for which the intensity is sought, a - the angle between !J.I and r. This relation is called Biot and Savart's law. The magnetic field intensity of a long straight currentcarrying wire is H=2i, a
Q (44 ' ~)
where a is the distance from the wire to the point at which the intensity is sought. The magnetic field intensity at the centre of a circu lar loop of current-carrying wire is
H =2Jti ,
R
(4,50) Fig.
53.
Illustration
of
Biot and Savart's law. where R is the radius of the loop. The magnetic field intensity inside a toroid (Fig. 54) is
H -
2Ni r '
(4,51)
where N is the total number of turns of wire, r - the radius of the toroid. The field intensity inside a straight solenoid, whose length considerab Iy exceeds the diameter of a turn is
If=4Jtlli,
(4,52)
where n is the number of turns per cm of the length of the solenoid. In such a solenoid the field intensity is the same in magnitude and direction at all points, i.e" the field is homogeneous.
CH. IV. ELECTEIClTY
FUNDAMENTAL CONCEPTS AND LAWS
In electrical engineering the product ni for a solenoid is called the number'of ampere-turns per centimeter. . I oersted = I}GAn ampere-turns}cm = I ar!lpere-t.ur~/CtJ?' The field intensity of a moving charged particle (FIg 05) IS
The uni.t of magnetic flux in the CGSM system is the maxwell, 111 the MKSA system - the weber \Vh~n the ma~n~tic fl L1X through a circ~it is changed an ~leetf1c current IS mduced !ll the curcuit. This phenomenon IS called. electromagnetic induction, and the current thus genera ted IS called an induced current.
136
(4,53) where v is the
velocity of the
137
particle, r -'- the distance
Fig. 56. Magr.letic flux through surf
Fig. 54. Toroi d.
Fig.
field of moving cllargc.
,'J:-). I\\agrldi:
from the particle to the pnint of interest, {f - the anEOe between the direction of the velocity ,111d the line drawn tram the particle to the gi ven point of the fIeld.
4 Work Performed in the Motion of a Current· Carrying . Wire in a Magnetic field. Electromagnetic Induction When a current-carrying wire moves through a magnetic field work is performed: A = i (tD 2 - tD.), (4,54) where !D is the magnetic fiux through the current lo?p prior to "displacement and !D2 - ti1e ma:~nehc flux after dISplacement. . The magnetic flux through a loop ('n a homogeneous field) is defined as the prodUct of the magnetic induction by the area of the loop and the cosine of the angle behveen the direction of the field and the normal to the area of the loop (Fig. 56) (4.55) !D := 13& cos a.
The direc.tio~ ,of the induced current i,; alway,; ,uch that the magnetIc flej(l of the current opposes the chiJIwe jl] fluX which camed the induced curren' (Lenz' law). c-.· [he magnItude of the Induced electromotive force is g;ven by the formula
!'ltD g;=--. At
(4,56)
In other words, the induced e.m.!. is equal to the time rate o.f change .of ~he magneti~ flux through the loop. The nega' lIye slgnwdlcates the c1neetlOll of the e.m.!. (in accGrdance WIth Lenz' law).
5. Self-Induction Any change in the current in a conduetor lead' to the appearance ~:r a'1 Indl,cecl e.m.f., which ca,lse:; a current llJ~' rement. ] [;1'; phenumenon is cailed .Iel f- illduction. [he ,elf-lli'lUCcd c.m f. CQ/J be cumputed by the fornw!a:
l£s=-- 1 ~ - 6.t '
(4,57)
138
CH. IV. ELECTRICITY
where L is the self-inductance,
~: -
FUNDAMENTAL CONCEPTS AND LAWS
the mean rate of change
of the current in the time interval !1t. L depends on the geometrical shape and dimensions of the conductor and on the properties of the medium. The unit of inductance in the MKSA system is the henry, in the CGSM system - the centimeter. A henry is clefined as the inductance of a conductor in which a change of current of 1 ampere per second induces an c.m.I. of 1 volt,
The region of space in which a magnetic field exists contains stored energy. The energy density of a homogeneous magnetic field (the energy per unit volume) can be computed by the formula: ft
H2 *
W=--
8rt
•
(4,63)
The inductance of a solenoid v,;ith a core is (4,58) where [I is the permeability, S - the cross-~'ectional area of the solenoid, 1- the ]en[~th of the wire, k - a coefficient depending on the ratio of the length of the wire to the diameter of the coil (lid). Table 96 gives values of k. It should be observed that when L is computed Using formula (4,58), the quantity ft for ferromagnetic materials will depend on the shape of the core. The inductance of a coaxial cable of length I is
~~ ,
(4,59)
where R2 and R 1 are the radii of the external and internal cylinders. The inductance of a two-wire line of length I and radius of the wires r (for r ~ a) is
a L=4ftlln - , r
(4,60)
where S is the cross-sectional area of the pole-piece of the magnet, and ftll - the permeability of air. Eddy carrents are induced currents in massive conductors placed in a variable magnetic field.
6. Magnetic Properties of Matter
Magnetic materials are materials in which a state of magne!isa!ion can be induced. When such materials are magnetised they create a magnetic lield in the surrounding space. The degree of magnetisa!ion of a magnetic material is characterised by the magneti,rztion vectO" I which is proportional to the field intensity generateel by the material. The magnetic inductiun Ii is a vector quantity which is equal to the average value of the induction inside the material. This quantity is composcd of the induction due to the field of the magnetising current (~L"H) and the induction due to the Held of the magnciic materi al (4;t/): (4,64) where fto is the permeability of vacuum. The magnetisation vector and the intensity of the magne!ising field are connected by the formula:
I=XH, where a is the distance between the axes of the wires. The energy of the ma:.;netic field of a conductor carrying current is
w=J.. Li2. 2
(4,62)
The lifting power of an electromagnet is given by
1 henry=lG 9 em.
L=2,lllln
139
(4,61)
(4,65)
where the quantity X, called the magnetic susceptibility, depends on the nature of the magnetic material and 011 its state (temperature, etc.). ~
See footnote on p. 99.
140
CH. IV. ELIi:CTRICITY
Since B=ltH, then
TABLES AND GRAPHS
+
/-t=/-to 41tX. (4,66) Materials for which /-t> 1 (but smal!!) are called paramagnet ic; if /-t< 1 the material is called diamagnetic. Materials for which /-t is much greater than unity are called ferromagnet ic. Ferromagnetic materi a Is are crysta Iline. Ferromagnetic and paramagnetic materials differ in a number of thei I' properties. a) The magnet isation curve, which expresses the relation between Hand B, is a straight line for paramagnetic materials, but it is an intricate curve for ferromagnetic materials. This means that /-t is a constant for paramagnetic materials, while for ferromagnetic materials it depends on the field intensity. b) The magnetic susceptibility of ferromagnetic materials varies with the temperature in a more complicated manner; at a certain temperature Tc called the Curie temperature (Cur ie point) the ferromagnetic properties disappear: the ferromagnetic substance becomes paramagnetic. . c) The magnetisation of a ferromagnetic material depends. !Il addition to the field intensity, on the magnetic history fa the sample: the value of the induction lags behind that of
a
J 41
The coercive force (H r) is the value of the magnetic field intensity needed to reduce the residual induction to zero (the direction of this field must be opposite to that of the retentiVity). . The saturation value (Is) is the greatest value of the magnetisation I. When a ferromagnetic material has been magnetised to the saturation value, further increase of the field intensity will have practically no effect on the magnetisation. The magnetic saturation is measured in gausses. The initial permeability (/-to) is the limiting value of the permeabi lity, when the intensity and the induction tend to zero, I.e.,
/-to= lim /-t. H
->0
The properties of ferromagnetic materials are explained by means of the domain theory of magnetisation. According to this theory, in the absence of an external magnetic field a ferromagnetic material is composed of many small regions or domains each magnetised to saturation. In the absence of 2n external field the directions of magnetisation of these domains are distributed in such a way that the total magnetisation of the specimen is zero. When a ferromagnetic material is placed in a magnetic field the domain boundaries are displaced (in weak fields) and the direction of magnetisation of the domains rotates towards the direction of the magnetising field, a. a result of which the material becomes magnetised.
ft.
TABLES AND GRAPHS Magnetic Field of the Earth Fig. curve
57. of
Hysteresis
100P:Ol-
magneU sati on
from
unmagnctised state. 123-demagnetisati on curve.
the field intensity. This phenumenon is called hysteresis and the curve ,Iepicting the depel1dence of B on H in the p;ocess of remagnetisalion (fIg. fi/) is called a hysteri'ois loop The nlue 01 the lesldllal magnetic induction IIf the ferromagnetic materi al aftel' the magl1etising field has been reduced to zero (H=O) is called the relentivity (B ).
r
The earth is surrounded by a magnetic field, The curve drawn through the points of the earth's surface at which the intensity is directed hori zan tally is called the magnetic equator. The points of the earth at which the intensity is directed vertically are called the magnetic poles. There are two such points: the north magnetic pole (i n the southern hernispl1erC) and the south magnetic pole (i n the northern hemisphere). The magnetic field intensity at the magneti c equa tor is about 0,34 oersted; at the magnetic poles it is about 0.66 oersted. In some places (the regions of the so called magnetic anomali es) the i lItensity increases sharply. In the region of the K.ursk magnetic anomaly it is 2 oersteds.
142
CH. IV. ELI'!CTRlCI1"Y
143
TABLES AND GRAPHS
Table 90
Table 88 Properties of Some Steels Used in Electrical Engineering
Steel
Initial permeability. 'gauss,ocr·
sted 250 300 400 GO 0 1,000
'" 31 '" 41
'" 42 '" 45 '" 310
!Y1axi1l1ut11 permeability, gauss oersted
Cocrci ve force, oersted
5,500 0,000 7,500 10,000 30.000
0.55 0.45 0.4 0.25 0.12
IInduction at 25 oerI
steds, ~ra uss
15,200 14,900 14,'100 14, GOO 17,800
Properties of Some Magnetically Refractive Materials These materials ~lfC c1Jaracteri~cd hy <:1 high coerci ve force, :lnd are used in the lnanufactufc of permanent magnets. The maximum
Eleelri c resi sti vi ty. ohm
value of the quantitv HB is an Important characteristic. -
8",
tity is proportional to the maximum energy of the surroundi ng the ferromagnetic rna teri a1.
mm 21 m
This quan-
magnetic field
1\'\J.xi111um
0.52 0.0 0.0 0.02 0.5
Coercive Magnet materi al
Rctcnti~
force,
viiy, gauss
oersted
Alioys: alni alnico <:dnisi magnico . . Chromium s(Pel 9F X3i\ Cohalt stecl ,)F 1<:30 . Molvbdenum steel . . PlatinulTl alloys . . . Tungsten steei 9FBA
s,son
IDO,OOO 11,000 37,000
In.ono -1,5006,800 10,000
Table 89
12.000
2:'()
liO
52,000 G1,000
7,()!I() 4 , () Oil J 2 ,() 00 [I,O()O ~I , 000
It
65 1 ,500-~, 700
value of quantity lIB'8"" erg/em:1
5G,OOO
Properties of Some Iron-Nickel Alloys These alloys have a high rermcabi lity, which decreases sharply at high Ii cld intensi ti es and hi gh frequenc ies. a nd in addi ti on, depends strongly 011 mcclElni (';}! str<1i ns.
Alloy
Chromi um-permailoy (HBOXC) Giperonl :J 0 Giperom 766 . . . . . iron, icchni cally rJtHC Molybden um-permal· loy (4% Mo) . Permcndur Sili can iron Superperrn al ioy (5% \ Mo)
Ini tial pcrrncalJilily, gauss ocrsted
l\laximum
3,000 3,400 14,000 200
Isn,OOO
2,000 800 4 C, 0
i 20, O()O A ,;) ()() 8,000
pcrmc<:llJi -
lily, gauss
,,8,O(}O '15,0 ()() 5,000
__ __sno,ooo
100.000 .
.
..
Table 51 Cocrcive force. oer.stcd
SatufJtion value of maf:!'net isation, gauss
0.015
6,500
0.0·\ 1.0
21,500
0.02 2.0 0.4-0. G
8,500 21.000 20,000
o .(I(i
0.0:11
7,500
,
Properties of Magneto-Dielectrics Magneto·dielectrics (and ferriles) are materials possessing both a relatively high magnetic permeability and a high electric resistivity,
Material
Alsifer pq·6 . pq·9 . <.1>11 25 Carbonvl iron Magneli te
[1.,
lvlC1ximum ope·
5-G 9-10 20-2·[ II G-D
tiD 2-3 I 30·50 5·10
g-auss'ocrsted [ rati ng frequency. l\1c;sec
145
TABLES AND GRAPHS
CH. IV. ELECTRICITY
144
Table 94
Table <;2 Principal Properties o[ Ferrites
Curie Points of Metals
Ferrites are mixtures 0\ metals (nickel, zinc. iron) sn1Jjecled to special heat treatment, as a result of which they acquire a high reo sistivity.
Substance 1'-, gauss/oersted
Ferri te
liOO f)GO
55 711 1111 120 LliJl
400 200 200 1511 15 10
1"1I 1211 250 360 400 400
2,000 2,000 1,000
Ferrocart-2 , 000-1 Ferrocart-2, 000-1 I Ferrocart-I ,000 Ferrocart-600 Ferrocart-500 Ferrocart-400 Ferroeart-200 Ferrocart 11-4 Ferroeart H-5 Ferrocart P4 -15 Ferracar t P4 -10
M(lximum opera li ng temperature, °C
B max' gauss
2,500 2,500 3,200 3, I 00 2,800 2, ;,00 1,800 4,200 4,800 1,8S0 1,400
Gadolinium Permalloy, 30% HellS ler alloy Nickel . . . . . Permalloy. 78%
I
Te, °C
20 70 200 35 R 550
I
Substance
Te , °C
Magnetite... . Iron, electrolytic Iron, resmelted In hydrogen Cobalt
585 769 774 1,140
Table 95 Specific Magnetic Susceptibility (per gram) of Some Metals at 18° C in CGSM Units
Table 93 Permeability (~t) of Paramagr.etic and Diamagnetic Materials in CGSM Units
The specific susceptibility 'sp is eqllal to the ratio o[ the susceptibility
x
to the density o[ the material p: 'sp=.x.. .
:'
Metal Paramagnetic \ _ _m_a_te_r_ia_l_ _-'-_(I_'_-_I_)_X_l_O_;,;-
Air . . . • . • Aluminil.lm Eboni te Li qui d oxygen Ni trogen . Oxygen. Platinum Tungsten.
0.38 23 14
3,400 0.013 1.9
3GO 176
Diamagnetic m_a_t_e_l"l_·'_11
Benzene Bismuth Copper . Glass . . Hydrogen Quartz . Rock salt . Water . . .
\ 1 ( -
'sp X 10'
Metal
'sp X 10'
10' p.) X
7.5 17G 10.3 12.6 0.063 15. I 12.G 9.0
Aluminium Antimony Cadmium. Calci um Chromium
Copper Germani lllll Indium. Lead . . Lithium
0.58 -0.87 -0.18 0.5 3 6 -0:086 -0,12 -0.11
-0.12 1I.5
/vlanganese /Vlerc-ufY
.
Scleni um .
511ver Sadi urn Tclluriurn Tin. . Tungsten . Vanadi urn Zinc
7.5 -0.19 -0.32 -0.20
o
G
-0' 31 0.,\
0.28 1.4 -0.157
--_._----=-------_._-_--!...---10
").1J'.
16
CH. IV. ELECTRICITY
146
FUNDAMENTAL CONCEPTS AND LAWS
Dependence of Magnetic Permeability and Induction on the Magnetic Field Intensity /! 10000 ?DilDO
I I I -\ I I
II
10000 ,
Ratio of length of to di ameter (if d)
/
.L. l/?~
If; \,/:f
15000
Permo//a>,
i\ 50000 0
10000
1\ 1><1-.; Ar!1lCo/rOll
1/
~ O.l
SOJO
I I 0.9
o.p
0.8
1/ o
H,oers/e&
I---
V
20
40
- -
00
SO
100
13,91111SStS
J\l iTOn_ Sw
/BOOO
,,-
/2000 8000
-
10-
V
1/
~
/
~ ~
~~ -
fOO0
'-120
~
-80
40
40
80
-'
120
Il,0ers!etl$
II
-8000
k
r--
/20
Note.
For
lrd~
lO" is dose to
llnit~y.
H,oers/e{$
Fig. 5~)' Dependence of i ndllC~i,().n o~ intensity (curve]- electrolytic tron, curve 2 - Iow- carbon steel,. curve 3 - cast steel; curve 4 - cast !fan).
Fig. 58. Dependence of permea· bility of iron and permalloy all the intensity in weak helds.
D. ALTERNATING CURRENTS FUNDAMENTAL CONCEPTS AND LAWS An alternating current is one which periodically reverse,; its direction. A current which varies periodically only in magnitude is called a pulsating direct current. In practice most frequent use is made of alternating currents which vary sinusoidally (Fig. 61). Periodic currents which vary otherwise than sinusoidally can be repre',ented to any degree of approximation E by a sU1110f sinusoidal alternatim; currents (see p. 77). The instantaneous values of a sinusoidal alternating current and voltage are given by the formulas: t i=! m sin wt, (4,67) u=U m sin (wt qJ), (4,68)
+
w=2rtf,
1/
"12000
V
-1600.'U
I ... j:::"
l-- ~ './
Fig. 60. Hysteresis loop for soft irull Jlld tempered steel.
\
Ta/)Ie 96 Values of Coefficient k for Calculating Inductance
B.iflPSSP!
;COOO
147
(4,69)
where! m and U m are the maximum values (amplitudes) of the current and the voltage, w is the ?=O). angular (cyclic) frequency of the current, t - the time, qJ - the phase shift between the current and the voltage (see p. 76), f - the frequency of the current. 10* Fig. G 1. Graph of alternati ng e.m.f. and current (sine law,
148
149
TABLES AND GRAPHS
CH. IV. ELECTRICITY
The rfJcctive value of an alternating current (1) is defined as the direct current which would develop the same power in an active resistance as the given alternating current. In most cases (but not always!) ammeters and voltmeters show the effective values of the current or voltage. For sinusoidal currents
For Rr=R c the impedance is a minimum (see formula (4,74», a~d the current has its maximum value. This phenomenon IS called series resonance. The phase difference between the current and the voltage is determined fl'om the relations:
t an qJ
wL-~ wC R
(4,70) cos qJ=
}
'
(4,75)
i.
(4,71) The power developed by an alternating current in the circuit is An inductor L (a device possessing inductance) in an alternating-current circuit acts like a resistance RL in the circui t, 1. e., it red uces the current. The quantity RL which describes the behavior of an inductor is called the induct ive reactance: (4,72) and is due to the appearance of an e.mJ. of self-induction in the coi 1. An alternating current in an inductor lags behind the voltage by 90 0 • A capacitor in an alternating-current circuit conducts current (as distinct from direct current!). The quantity which describes the behavior of a capacitor in an alternating-current circuit is called the capacitive reactance:
I
Rc=wC'
P=UI cos qJ.
The factor cos qJ is called the pOiL'llr factor. . When an ~lternating current passes through a conductor It,generates mduced currents; as a result the current density wI.ll be greater. at the surface of the conductor than in the rmddle. The dlff~rence will b.e the greater, the greater the frequency (at high frequencies the current in the middle of the conductor may be practically zero), The active resis~ance of a conductor will therefore be greater to alternat1I1g current, than to direct current. This phenomenon is called the surface effect (or skin eOect).
TABLES AND GRAPHS (4,73)
The current in a capaci tor leads the voltage by 90°. In a circuit containing resistance, inductive reactance and capacitive reactance connected in series the quantity
Change in Resistance upon Transition from Direct to Alternating Current The change in resistance depends on a parameter ;: t=0.14
(4,74) ca \led the impedance, is analogous to the resistance of a direct-current circuit.
\
(1,76)
d~VI
p.! p
,
where d -!s ~h~ diameter ot the wire (cm), f - the frequency (clsec) c. the resl stl VI ty (ohm cm). fJ. - tlle permeabi Ii (Y. R·,c -- t he resis~ tance the wi.re to atternating current, Rdc - the rcsi;tance 01 the same WIre to dIrect current.
0:
FUNDAMENTAL
CH. IV. ELECTRICITY
150
CONCEPT~ AND
LAWS
j/ue.
Table 97
lilTC 7
lSI
f-- 1--
Derlh of Penetration (a) of High frequency Currents (for a Straight Copper Wire with Circular Cross-Section)
. . . ., v
6
V
5
./ /'
4 3
j,/"
Frequency
Dept h of pene· tration. mm
2
V o
Z
4
6
8
/0
IZ
t=D,!4d~ '.,2. Graph of
Fig.
14
/0
18
to i
0=50.33
1/00
.
,
$00
700 C)
~ <S
600
~
500
~ .~ 400
1\\
"'" 300 ~O0
JOO
t'~
1\ 1\
i//
z\ 1\ \ \
V 1/ \ 1/
K .\ . a ~t1 Jl
I
/QOP
500'
t}ciic (refjllellCf, (rQ'ftilllls/seC) l
L
, R
L=l licnry. C=IO p.fd.
c'
0.006
-{p~
.
where p is the resistivity (ohm mm'!m). I'- - the permeability of the malerial, f - the frequency (c. sec). 2. The dcpth of penetration is the distance from the surface of the wire at which the current density is e times less than at the surface. where e is the base of natural logarithms Ie"" 2.72).
fUNDAMENTAL COI':CEPTS AND LAWS
/
tuNS
0.021
E. ELECTRIC OSCILLATIONS AND ELECTROMAGNETIC WAVES
V /z
/
O.OG5
/
VV
V'......
Me'sec \10 MC'seC/IOO MC,'sec
'~z
",~V
\\
0.21
Rac/Rdc
\ariation of In([uct;ve Reactance,. Capacitive Reactance and Impedance with frequency
tOOO
O.G5
II
Notes. I. Calculations can be made for other frequencies and other materials by means of the formula
Versus ;.
.sOO
\ 10 kC!SCCllOO kcisec
V
and Z versus
It)
for
Ra=IOO ohms (it is as-
sumed that R a is independent of the frequency).
Osci lIatory variations of the charge, current or voltage in an electric circuit are called electric oscillations. An alternating electric current is an example of electric oscillations. High·frequency electric oscillations are generated as a rule by means of an oscillating circuit. An oscillating circuit is a closed circuit containing inductance Land capaci tance C. The period ot natural oscillations of a circuit is (4,77)
FUNDAMENTAL CONCEPTS AND LAWS
CH. IV. ELECTRICITY
152
153
Electromagnetic waves represent a process of simultaneous propagation of variations of electric and magnetic fields. The vectors of the electric and magnetic field intensities (E and H) in an electromagnetic wave are perpendicular to
!
t
E
Fig. 64. Graph of current in circuit with damped ooci !lations.
This relation is called Thomson's formula; it is valid in the abspnce of energy losses. In the case of energy losses in the circuit (when an oh1m mic resistance is present) the natural oscillations of the circuit are damped:
T
2Jt
-./~
V
_(ll)2' (4,78)
LC
The term
2L
UR
is
usualIy
very small. Fig. 64 represents l.-.----.L11 a graph of damped asci llaYres tions in a circui t. When an alternatinge.m.f. Fig. 6;). l
Fig. 66. Vectors F. H, ond netic wave.
,J
in eleetrot11a:;-
each other and to the direction of propagation of the \\'JH'S (Fig. 66). This is true for the propagation of e!cdroma;;nctic waves in vacuum. The velocity of electromagnetic waves in \'acuum is independent of the wavelength and equals
co=(2.99776 ='= 0.00004) X 10 '0 em/sec. The velocity of electromagnctic \Vans in diITcrcnt media is less than in vacuum:
c,
C=n'
(4,7J)
where n is the index of refraction (sec p. 15e:). The Electromagnetic Spectrum The wavelengths are plotted logarithmically, The fir~t horizontal row gives the wavelengths (upper values III dIfferent nni ts of length, lower values in em). The second row gives the frequencies in eycles'sec, the third and fourth rows - the names of the wavelength and frequency ranf~es. I~ows 5 and 6 show the types of electromagnetic radiators rOIlS 7 ami 8 --- the principal methods of generatin Cf electro: lIlagneiic oscillaiiol1s. "
...'" (conI:)
10 8.km
'. 00==;c
_
1O",km.
/! I.,~.I/o"! ,-"-' , I! ~J ISI,n;!" J
r
1;,08
II
I
3'10"
II
I
tow fTey'ue11iies
Au{/;o
.2-.L
n
,f'(J(//O wupes
fretl";2fJcie~LOn; WQi/es
!NediU;;\ wares '£;//;/eJSJOT! tvave$
Heier wores
wOVe'S
~-
uscil/Il::./'"ilJ"r7",s"o,::.f-,J,:.cI IJ::./"PS::....
EI~clrlc71
ttlm
~
I
I
.0
I._v,u-'
I
t.m
~m
Low frewelicf/ wuYeS
~_;_,=_:..._:;:o=...::"::;
61
, ...
to':;.km
I
I
fJ~ciJ7ieler wares
_
/l",·
-------------------------------Cd/;otle USli//u/or
7I 8 II'
~ ~ fi.C.Y'enert1lt1r
/s!/;7ckro.lJOliS (jE!'JerJlor 1/117 rhesslof
l~
. lIerlzlt1lluscl!/alur
!!lU11lSUllcircuI!
~
ell
~~t
~
:r:
< m t'"' m
n>-j
;S Q >-j
-<
tlJjjti~ th
'r·
f /0;;;71
Z!
.r
-.r.Jc /$
j},.i
"
IC"'/:~'elBr
t
i,i(jl'S
I"
Ito-'
1.N{}tO
!HO"
..
~waYes_.
51 61
I
I
llO"
I
Suomi/li-
::t:~~
lJecomicron
I
I
10. 7
I
H0 17
,I
-- '>
~~
#Pt1r tU/, "3: u/il'f!j//!Jil!! tli/ranolel
N/cron
I
I
I
I i't:!I':7tor
Quarll ll7eiCl.filj~rofloClr/om.o
I
I1JI!mc ore
r~.·• ·I~.
I
SjJtl7l dis- ,
ClJOf'?NfI
I
vacuo
I
Labo/,o!(li!l.
I
I
1
I
Call1ma-rafS
1 J SoIl
:"c•. f,
~-
lil;;. 01, Electromagnetic spedruill.
'n
C
I
/luFfI
~
tJ
> 3: m
:z filoaioacl/rt'mss/on
lee/mical and memcol %-rc¥, It/bE'S
..
/0'"
3'10"
A'r7f/S
I
· ... ' % ·
4~·!1~~c~
~8 IIlo'S
~/'!I
Nu/ecu/(),ll ami t1I011llC nort1l/iJrls
,.
'..L:
I
fIIl/'t1Yiulei WilY'S
Jllfrurea WUYl'3
I
7
8
I
10·'
I
u:",j;OWt7J1tl S
IN/hinder
"'.....
~
• • 'H'I'
I
~
.-oj
>
t'"'
8
:zn
m '0 >-j (f)
> :z tJ r-'
> :::: c.n
'.n
'"
156
CH. IV. ELECTRICITY
Low-frequency and radio waves have the lowest frequencies; such waves are generated by various artificia I osci lIa· tors. Infrared radiation is emitted mainly by oscillating parts of molecules or groups of atoms. Light waves are emitted by atoms and molecules when electrons in the outer shell pass from one stable orbit to another (see p. 188)_ Ultraviolet rays have the same origin as light waves. X -rays are emitted when electrons in the inner shells of atoms pass from one orbit to another. Gamma-rays are emitted in the radioactive decay of atomic nuclei. Further information on the properties of various types of waves will be found in Chapter V; Optics.
CHAPTER V
OPTICS FUN DAMENTAL CONCEPTS AND LAWS Light is electromagnetic radiation of wavelength considerably shorter than that of radio waves (see the electromagnetic spectrum). Such radiation is emitted by atoms when their electrons jump from one orbit to another (see p. 188). 1. Photometry The energy radiated by a body per second is called the intensity of radiation. The energy transmitted by a light wave per second to a surface is called the flux of radiation through the surface
where
IS8
CH. V. OPTICS
FUNDAMENTAL CONCEPTS AND LAWS
The unit of luminous flux is the lumen. One lumen is equal to the luminous flux contilined in a solid angle of one steradian when the luminous intf'll:ii ty is one candela. Prior to the introduction of the new standard candela. the international candle in the form of electric hulbs of spe~ cial design was used as the standard of luminous intensity. I internationill candle=1.005 cande las. 0:.. The illuminance (E) is the luminous flex incident on unit area of a surface:
2. Principal Laws of Geometrical Optics
.::t>IB}~~!ilEt2]__ 2
'.:.
3
5
E=S' cD
(5,2)
\\here S is the surface area receiving the luminous flux. The units of illuminance are the lux and the phot: I lux=1 lumenjm 2 , I phot=1 lumen j cm 2 •
Fig. G8.
liSSR Slale standard light source: 1 - platinum. 2 -fused tho.rium oxide tube. 3 -fused thorium oxide cup. 4 - thorium oxide powder, 5 - silica container.
The brightness of an extended l',h1 source (or surface seen by reiJected light) is referred to technically as its luminance (B): J
B=5'
(5,3) ..
where S is the visible area of the surface (the area of the projection of the surface on to a plane perpendicular to the line of vision), and J is the luminous intensity. Luminance is expressed in units of luminous intensity per unit area, as cande las, m 2 • An old unit of luminance is the stilb. A stilb is equal to the luminance of a source which radiates a luminous intensity of I candela per em" of luminous surface. 1 stilb=lO' candelasJm 2 • Photometry deals with luminous intensity, luminance and iJlumimnce, as determined by visual perception and from measurements of the luminous llux.
159
Geometrical optics deals with thosc phenomena which can be explained on the assumption thilt \j';ht travels through a homogeneous medium in a strai~ht line. The angle of incidenc~ is the angle between the incident ray and the normal to the interface between two media at the point of incidence. The angle of reflection is the angle between this normal and the reflected ray. The angle of refraction is the angle between the normal and the refrilcted ray. I. When a ray is incident on the interfilce between two media the angle' of incidence is equal t~ the angle of reflection. The incident ray, the normal, and the reflected ray all lie in the same plilne. The magnitude of reflection is characterised hy the reflection coefficient p, which is equal to the ratio of the energy flux in the reflected wave to that in the incident wave. (The reflection c02fflcient is frequently expressed in per cent.) 2. The ratio of the sine of the angle of incidence to the sine of the am,le of refraction is a constant (for a gi\'en wavelength). The incident ray, the normal, and the refracted ray are in the same plane. sin i
-.--.,=n. SIll I
(5,4)
The quantity n is called the relative index of refraction of the second medium with respect to the first medium. and is equal to the ratio of the velocities of light in the two media: n=S- .
c,
The inde£ of refraction with respect to vacuum is called the absolute index of refraction of the medium. The index of refraction n depends on the wave length. A ray passing from a medium with a greater index of refraction to a medium with a smaller index of refraction can undergo total reflection. The least angle of incidence i er at which all the energy of the light is reflected from the interface is called the critical angle. The magnitude of the critical angle i er is determined from the formula ..
I
SIll1er=n'
CH. V. OPTICS
160
161
FUNDAMENTAL CONCEPTS AND LAWS
where n is the relative index of refraction of the medium in which total reflection takes place. Rough surfaces reflect light rays in all directions (di[fuse reflection), as a result of which they are visible to the eye. When light passes through thin metal plates its intemity is reduced. The change in the luminous intensity (for nor· mal incidence on the plate) is given by the relation -
/ x=/oe
4~n :::- k I.
Fig.
0~.
Path of rays io thin cOllvcrging lens.
where /0 is the incident light intensity, / x - the inte nsity of the light after passage through a plate of thickness x, A - the wavelength, e ~ the base of natural logarithms. n and k - optical constants of the metal which are determined from the relations
n 2 k= ~ , n 2 (1 - k 2 )=e. Here a is the conductivity of the metal, v - the frequ"nc' of the light wave, and e - the dielectric constant. 3. Optical Instruments The formula of a thin lens (Fig. 69) is
-~+J,=(n--I)(~-~i=~, a a r r ) f l
(5,5).
2
where a is the distance from the lens to the object, a'the distance from the lens to the image, f - the focal length of the lens, r l and r2 - the radii of curvature of the spherical surfaces of the lens, n - the relative refractive index of the material of the lens. In formula (5,5) the quantities a, d, r l , and r 2 are considered positive when their directions, as measured from the lens, coincide with the direction of the light rays; otherwise they are considered negative. The magnification of a magnifying glass is
M=250
f ' where
f
i~
the focal length in mi Iii meters.
Fig. 70. Path oi lent to microscope to optical system
cro'Co'H'. 0
1
( ) ! - krhe''' '''1 1I iva.. 0: --- lens cqU\ v:d~nt i l1lJge 01 . .-'dJ ull reU na
.1nd
L'yepi l'CC.
/1. 2 Liz, -
eye.
l,
(5,6) Fig. 71. PaUl 01 ray,-'; III tc1cscop-:. I - r;ly:; l·lllL~rgi jIg from a single point of the object. :2 - rays emcrgi llg troiU
-
-
-
__
n
_
CH. V. OPTICS
162
FUNDAMENTAL CONCEPTS AND LAWS
The overall magnification of a microscope is
M --~t1 X 250 t2
'
(5,7)
where t1 and t2 are the focal lengths of the objective and the eyepiece in millimeters, ~ is the distance from th~ upp~r focus of the objective to the lower focus of the eyepiece In millimeters (Fig 70). The magnification of a telescope is
M=0, t2
(5,8)
where tl and 12 are the focal lengths of the objective and the eyepiece (Fig. 7i). The reciprocal of the focal length is called the power of the lens: D=+. The unit of pO\ler of a lens is the diop.
ter (D), equal to the of I m.
PO\\
cr of a
lens \\ith a focal length
4. Wave Prcperties of Light Interference. When two waves travel simultaneouslY through a medium there will be a resultant vibration of the particles of the medium at edeh point (in the case of mechanical waves), or a resultant oscillation of the electric and magnetic field intensities (in the case of electr0magnetic waves). The resultant 0scillations will be determined by the amplitude and tlie pl,ase uf each of the waves. The superposition in space of two (or more) waves of the same period leading to a reinforcement of the resultant amplitude at some points and to a diminution of the ampli tude at others is ca lied interterence. Interference of waves of any kind (including light waves) takes place only if the superposed waves have the same period and a constant phase difference at each point. Sources which generate such waves are called coherent. For polarised waves (see p. 166) to di5play interferen.ce it isnecessary in addition, that their planes of polansatlOn ~ol~clde. Coherent sources of lif:ht can only be obtall1ed artIfiCially. In a homogeneous medium every colour corresponds to a definite frequency "f the w'lve. When a wave passes lI1to another mediU1l1, the w;;"elength changes, but the frequency remains the same.
163
Daylight consists of electromagnetic radi:dion of various wavelengths (corresponding to colours from red to violet). 1 he colours of thin films arc due to the interference of w~ves reflected from the upper and lo,ver surfaces of the film (when observed in reflecteJ light). When observed in transmi tted ligh t in terference takes place between the trans· mitted w~ves and the waves refiected from the upper ::nd lower surfaces of the HIm. Diffraction. The defleclion of light from a rectilinear path otherwise than by rellection or refraction is called diflraction. Fig. 72 depicts schematically a lon~ narrow slit, by me:ms of which it is possible to observe the phe. nomenon of diffraction. Light falls perpendicularly on the ;urface containin,!': the sli!. Upon passing through the ;lit the jif(ht rays 3re deflect2d from a' strail(11t path, and as a result of the sLibsequent superposition (interference) _ _ _-:I,;., of the ligh t waves one wi 11 observe light and dark fringes Fig. 72. Dilfradion of pare_dIel on the screen. rays by :l si ngle -"Ii t. n) SchemaThe positions of the dark iie-diagram ofslii. b)
aJ
b sin
~=nA,
(5,9)
lens.
\lv'here ~ is the angle between the normal and the given direction, n - an integer, and b - the width of the sli t. A series of furrow" p:lrallcl equi-distant slits of equal width is called a di/Jraction waling. The width of a slit plus the distance between h\o adjacent slits i.t; called the
grating interv!!l. Fig. 73 gives a schematic dcpiction d ~ difTi"ilclion grat. ing. The positions of the fringes 01" 11laX;mU1Tl iiPcn',ity on the screen are determined from the condition (for normal
1I*
164
Cll. V. OPTICS
incidence of light on the graling):
d sin
a~cn'k,
(5,10)
where d is the gralinl( interval. Due to the c1iiIraciion of light waves there is a limit to the alJilitv uf optical instruments to shol'! increasinl;11' greater detail on the "urface of an o';ject at higher ma:inificalions.
aJ
T 1 I
iii£;
the cxlrl'l11e rays from a painton lhe oIJjeet which cnier the oi'je"live and rc,lch lhc ()b~erl'er's eve). DispcIsion of lirzhL The velocily of light in a given medium depend.i 011 the wavelenglh. Tids phenomenon is called
disperSion of light velocity.
!
I
i i
j ;
b}
FUNDAMENTAL CONCEPTS AKO LAWS
1 I
I
Fig. 74. Palh of rays in
f;l~;ss
prism.
The index of refraction al o o varies with
the
wavelcncth
(dispersion of the index of refraction). Due to (hper,ion while lif~hl (\\'hieh consist, of radialion of differenl wavelenl(lhs) is lJro!;cn IIp by a giS'" prism into iis components. Rays of shorter wavelength are IJent towards the base of the prism more siron,~ly than waves of grealer wavelength (F;g. 74). Polarisation of light. In lhe lighl waves emilled IJ'. difTerent 'ources the vectors E (and, hence. If) are o'rien',ed randomly. Such Ught is called natl/ral Ught.
j
Co
---J
!
·-----~:..-----------&'11.'el1
j
Fig. 73. Di!fr"clion of parallel ing. II) Schelllcdic diagTam oi Sibil' direction of the diffraclcd ti cal center of lCll~~. b ~ screen
The srnalle,[ di-iance IJellleen tllO points at which their image" do nol overlap is called the least separation for resolution of an optical inslrument (0). For a microicope the least separation for re:,o!ution is:
I)~ O~~l}" SLlli
('i,ll)
wllere u b the "pertur, ang Ie (hall ille angle suutcndcd by
Fir;. 7G.
Rotation
of
plane of poLtrisation of polarised ray in quartz plate.
It is possib1" (for example, by passing natural light hrough a plate of tOlIflnalinc) to obtain waves in which
166
CH. V. OPTICS
the If vectors will have a sin:J,Jc diredion al a1l points in space. Such wave; are called lillearly polarised (or plane polariscd). In linearly poIMi,''<:d lir,ht each of [he vectors E and If lies in a given plane. The plane of the vector of magnetic field intensity H is called ,he plane of polarisation. Some substances (for example, quartz, aqueous colutions of sugar) have the ab:lIty to .turn the plane of polarisation of linearly polansed hghl pa'3s!nC( through them. This phenomenon is called rotation of the plane of polarisation (Fig. 75). Light can be pari ially polarised by reflection from a dielectric. At a certain angle of incidence the reiiected lioht is completely polarised .. This angle is called the polarising angle. It can lle de;erlllilled from a relation called Brewster's law: tan ip,c~n, (5,12) where n is the index of refraction. Pressure of light. When elec!romar;netic waves strike the surface of a bodv theY exert mechanical pressure upon it (ca lIed the rodit:t iOIl pressure). The magnitude of the radiation pressure is given by
lV'
pc~c (I
+ pl,
T
FUNDAMENTAL CONCEPTS ANI:> LAWS
changes by an amount
£
167
there is an equivalent change in the
mass of the system equal to';;2 (c is the velocity of light). Hence, for every photon emi !ted by a body i is hv reases by an amount t'J.m= c2 •
mass
dec-
Those properties of light which are due to the discrete nature of radiation are called quuntum (or corpuscular) properties. Light, like all other forms of electromagnetic radiation, possesses both wave and corpuscular properties. The photoelectric etJect is one of the l1lanifestatio'ls of lhe corpuscular nature of light. The ell1i~;sion of electrllns from the surface of an illuminated body is called the external photoelectric ef}ect. Laws of the exterrwl photoelectric effect. 1. The number of electrons released per second (or the saturation current) is directly proportional 10 the light lIux. 2. The velocily of the emitted electrons is independent of the light intensity, and is determined by the frequency of the incident light. The velocity n;ay be determined from the equation
(5,13) (5,14)
where lV' is the quantity of radiation energy incident normally on 1 cm" of surface per sec, c -- the velocity of light, P ~ the relJer·tion coefficient. The pressure exerted by the sun ',; rays on a bright day is equal apprOXimately to 0.4 dyne,m' (4 X 10- 5 dyne;cm 2). 5. Quanlum Properties of Light The energy of any form of electromagnetic radiation including light, always exists in the form of discrete portions: These. portIons of energy, "'hlch possess the properties of matenal corpu<'lcs, ilre called radiution quanta or photons. The energy of a photon depends on the frequency of the radiation v. The energy of a photon E=hv, where h=6.623 X 10- 27 erg sec. The constant h is called Planck's colis/ant. . According t? the, fundamental priIriple'; of modern phySIC:; (theory c, lelallVJt)), wh"nelt:r (he energy of a system
where hv is the energy of a photon, If - the work function (see p. 114), m - the mass of the electron, and v - its velocity. Equation (5,14) is called rills/ein's . 3. For every substance there a frequency below which the photoelectric eiTed is not observed. This critical frequency is called the photoelectric threshold (vcr)' It is determined from the relation
hvcr=rf·
(5,15)
When semiconductors and dielectrics are illuminated, some of their atoms may lose electrons, which, however, (in contradistinction to the external photoelectric effect) do not escape through the surface or the body, but remain inside the body. This p[;eno:llenO!1 is called the internaL photoelectric etJect. 1\s a re,lllt of ti1e internal photoelectric effect the resistance of sC!ilicol1 :uclur·; an, dielectric; decrea;es upon illumination.
168
FUND.~ME:t\TAL CONCEPTS
CH. V. OPTICS
When the interface between a metal and a semiconductor is illuminated, an electromotive force arises. This phenomenon is called the harrier-layer e{ject. Photoelectric cells, photoconductive cells, barrier-laver cells and solar batteries are based on the photoelectric phenomena. The photoelectric cell is ba",ed on the external photoelectric effect. It consists of a sealed glass bulb containing a light-sensitive cathode and an anode. The cathode is a thin film deposited on the inner surface of the bulb; the anode is a ring (or disc:) placed in (he centre of the bulb. The two electrodes are connected throUGh an external batterv. When the cathode is illuminated a galvanometer' in the circuit registers a photoelectric current: i'l =v rD -t- io' where t1J is the flux, of radiant energy, y - the integral senszllVzly of the photoe lect rIC ce II, i o - the darll current, i.e., the current in the phoioelectric cell in complete darkness. Photoelectric cells which arc Lased on the in1ernal photoelectric eHect are called photocond'ic/ive cells. The sensitivity of photoconductive cells is characterised b v the specifiC sensitivity (/(). This quantity is equal (0 (he' ralio of the integral sensi'.ivity to the applied potential difTerenee U, i.e., 7 /
i ,j>
\ ."'" {jeD
Photoconductive cells are ;]iso characterised by the magnitude of the ratio R d where Rd is the resistance in the
R---;:'
dark and R,j, is the resistance upon illumination. 6. Thermal Radiation Heated bodies emit invisible waves (so-called ultraviolet and infrared rays) in addition to visible light. The radiation of heated bodies is called thermal (or heal) radiation. A body which completely absorbs all the radiation incident on it is. called a hlach /:ody (or perfect absorber). A hollow box with a small hole in it is a black body. The rate at which a body radiales energy of a' given wavelength from unil surface of the body is called the
AND LAWS
169
emissive po,cer or emissivity :-It the given temperature (F)). The fraction of the incident radiation of a given wavelength 'A which i" absorbed bv a body is called the ah.'orptive po,~'er or at)sorptivity (A)J. 'The emissivity at a given temperature is proportional to the absorptivity at the same temperature (Kirchhoff's law):
(5,16) where f\ at a given temperature is a constant for all bodies.
I
In the U.S.S.R. the quantity
F ie . e)] is called the speetfA
1
•
ral emissivity, For a black bocl\' A;c=l and, hence £;,=10;. for all \\3\'e· lengt hs. The rate of radintion of energy of all wavelengths from a biack body (E) is proportional to the fourth po\\cr of the absolute lellipera(ure (Slefan,BoUZllJann's lim): 1'=-01",
where ihe coefl1cicnt waH/I'm' degree'.
of
(5,17)
proportionality a=5.G7x 10-"
7. Types of Spectra The dependence of the intensity of radi:-ltion of :-I on the wavelength (or frequency) is called the spectmm radiation. This dep2ndenc-e is usual'y depicted in graph forlll, For example, Fig. 76 gives the spectrulll of thermal radiation of carbon for different temperatures. This spectrum closely resembles that of a black body. It is evident from the figure that at any given tempera. ture there is a certain wavelength (f'max) for which the energy of radiation IS a maxirnwn. For a b lack body the wavelength corresponding to the maximum energy of radiation is inver-;el.y proponional to the absolute temperature T (Wien's law of displacement):
AmJ,T=C,
(5,18)
where C is a constant, equal 10 O.28~)8 em degree-I The coioured band obtained when light i, broken up b v 3 prism (or other device) i,; sometimes cidled a spectrum '( i" the nanow sense 0/ the word).
1
170
CH. V.
OPTIC~
Heated solids emU a continuous spectrum in which all the spectral colours are present, one colour merging gradually 'nto the next
1 I
TABLES AND GRAPHS
171
The spectra of heated gases and solids are called emission spectra. If the radiation emitted by a heated solid is pacsed through a vapour, then in the continuous spectrum of the body dark Jines appear, at wavelengths corresponding to the lines of the emission spectrum of the given vapour. Such a spectrum is called an absorption spectrum. Gases absorb radiation of the same wavelength as they themselves emit (law of Kirchhoff and Bunsen). The so-called Fraunhofer lines in the solar spectrum (see Fig. 78) are absorption lines due to the absorption of definite wavelengths of the continuous solar ,peetrum by vapours present in ,he atmosphere.
TABLES AND GRAPHS
Table 98 Relative Brightness Sensitivity (K)J for Daytime Vision (see Fig. 79)
.1/'//ruwiJlet
/"LweI?
Wavelength,
LI?/I'orett 1'6'9/{J/7
1\ :-
A "
Fig. 7G. Energy distribution in spectrum of inc':Hldcscent carbon at di ffcrent temperatures.
.In line
4,000 4,200 4,400 4,600 4,800 5,000
0,00041 0.0040' 0.023 0.060 0.I:J9 0.323
II
5,200 5,400 5,600 5,800 6,000 6,200
.noll
oO . .1,)·1 :
g:~i31
0.631 I 0.381
I
6,400 6.600 6,800 7,000 7,200 7.400 7,600
0.175 0.061 0.017 0.0041 0.00105 0,00025 0.00006
Note. The values of the relative brightness sensitivity are different for different people. They do not vary. however, too widely for people with normal vision. The tahle gives average values of 1\)",
l
I
8/lOIIUIIOl1iW6,5/kJ MW
, ,
I
~
,~
,= SlkIillllJ lilJllllf/
,
IiIIIlSSIVllJ
,
Illrrillm
, ,
-,
/If$t;pu
,
H/!rupt't/
, ,
&tvm
•
"'~
:'*l'CIIl'j'
or emiuion or some ~.,.,>: j"O IlC"''' on top ore the vovol,nl/lh. in anI/strom unHo( ) .
, , • ,If F;I/. 78. Sol_, 'p«trum with I'r.unltorer li_.
172
CH. V. OPTICS
...
I,: :~
k~ U!1l'llno,0/: .~ I ~~ I
~:
~ I ~ I ~I ~I l~';;I~J~I~l ~I1<:$1
/.0
0.8 0.5
I
I
I
I
I,:
II II
1 I
0.4
1 I I 1 ·I-V
0.2
o
,Jooo
I
I
I
:~
:I"
1
:
Illuminance in Some Typical Cases
I
I ~ i"-
~ooo
Table Wi
l{i 1"'2 1
. I
SOOD
4000
,I'M
I
~
I
I
)0
;"11
1000
Fig". 79. Curve of relative brig-llillC'SS :;cllsitivity
for dayli me vision.
Table 99 Luminance of Some Illuminated Surfaces Illuminuted surfuce
Table 102 Reflection Coefficient (,p) of Glass and Water for Different Angles or Incidence (in 0/0)
r (ni tru~;t'lJ)
helium . .
-
, ~ngle o[ incl·
~
Luminance, c£lndc las,/m 2
Substance Caoillary of superhigh pressure mercury arc Carbon arc crater . . . . Metal fj lament of incandescent lamp Kerosene lamp flame . . . Steari 11C cand Ie flame Moonless night sky Spa!k disch;lrge in xenon
0.2 II,Oiill3
5-2 10-15 :lx 10 ' 2. 5X 10'
Table 100
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
211-~1I
C<Jllde]as/m 2
Luminance of Various Light Sources
Surl
1011,0011 1II ,0 110 1,11110 1110 1110-2110 3 0- ~)O
Sun's rays at noon (middle laU tudes) During film shooLing- in studio . . Open area all a cloudy day . . . . Light room (ncar \vi ndo\\') Work lable lor delicale operations I II umi nati on necessary for re;;di ng Cinema screen III umi nati on from fLl 11 moon . Illumination from moonless night sky
Lumin
Cinema screen " . Sheet of \vhite paper (under illuminance 3050 lux) Sno\\' in di feet sunli gh t . • . . . . . . . . . Moon's surface
Source
173
TABLES AND GRAPHS
.
1';1 :lol
15X 10' 12X 10'·15x 10 8 15x 10' 1.5X 10"-2X 10' 1.5X 10' 5x 10 3
Glass Water
0
I Hoc I ,I, ,1,,1;1,1"" 0""' +" ,\0 SO I GO
70
80
S(J
90
I
.
4.7 2
L
2"14.vl".Jj,j"T'O'O
3V
91
100
10
1.IXI0I1 1.5Xl0 11 2.lxl()11
tioll 1.5, ?~: 2.5 at 11orm£1} incidence, For gl:ISS \viP] :1 film 01 sIlica
1 .;::, ><
of iJidex of refraction 1.0. I)
10 12
Note. For glass covered
wi til a film of si Ii ca
of index of refrac·
0.0 at llurnu! illcidcllce.
174
C~l.
TABLES AND GRAPHS
V. OPTlCS
Table 106
Table 103 ~eflectjon of Light Passing from Glass into Air Angle of incidence
Reflection of Light by Metals The figures in the table indicate the fraction of perpendicularly incident light reflected from the surface (in %)
0
100 /10
Angie of refraction
/20+0°135°139+9030' , 40°1600
00<
II
4.7
I
II
15.0 G.8
III II 12
36
47
.c
""§ >-
10°115010'1320/51°163"1790/820/90°1-
Fracti on of reflected energy itl % ·1.7
oj
~ ~
EC :::.::
UltraViolet
Table 104
<.::
1,880 2, 00 0 2,510 3. ~) 1 ~) III
Visible Colour
I
Colour
1< II 3,800-4,500 4,500 --1,800 4,800-5,100 5,100-5,500
cllowish-grcen Yellow . . _ . . Orange. . Red . __ . __ Y,
I
B
OJ
~
2
U
25 31 53
23 31 2b
(j\
~ ~l
.c:"
, C
'";r: j'§ I u
en
0,_
8
u
-
c:
N
Vl
7,000
8, 000 10,000 50, (JOO 100,000
74 9-1 97
17
G,1
22
73
38
3\1
75
\7 ll;
\8
'i ~\
'\\\
JI
\Ill
55 58 61
34 32
I 55 58 60
90 93 94
89 90 98
G2
95
65 02
9G
I I
A
Infrared
-
35 ,j.!
:n
11 72 83
a,OOO
ol1n~ari cs,
5,500-5,750 5,750-5,850 5,850-6,200 6,200-7,600
.)
I
5,000
22
25
",1
7l)
Wavelengths of Visible Region of Spectrum Bounqaries.
~
E:"
0
100 100
nc,n
Violet " Dark blue Light blue Green
175
97
(;\ fi,)
55
69
56
70 72 94
57
1
RI 93
69 62/ \17
-
I _-._------'--------'-----------'----Table 107 Critical Angles of Reflection
Table 105 Wavelengths of U1~~'~violet Region of Spectrum Name of range
Long wavelength ul travi old Middle wave/engtil u](rilviolet _ . Shod wavelengt Ir ultrav; old Va . ~. ullm ultraVic.:!cL . . . . .
Boundaries,
A
I
Substance
Suhs tance
'cr
I
Effect of R a : : : -
3,150-3,800
Suntan
2,800-3,150 2,000-2,800 < 2,000
Erythemogenic Bactericidal Ozonising'
Water _ . Glycerine. _ . Glass (light crown)
49 43 40
I Carbon
IiI
disu][i de . Glass (heavy fii 1: l) Diamond . . . . .
38 34 :24
Note. The values of i cr (in degrees) given in the Llh]c
1
176
CH. V. OPTICS
TABLES AND GRAPHS
Table 108 Wavelengths of Principal fraunhofer Lines I
Line
Element
Iwave1cn g th,
TaMe 109
Index of Refraction for Wavelengths Corresponding to SomQ of the fraunhofer Lines
;\ Fraunholer line
A
Oxygen
7,185
B
6,870
I-Iyc:lroger;
D,
Wavelength,
6,562.8
IOxygen ISodIum
5,8D5.9
Helium
5,875.6
'" <J
A
D
F
H
j7,590!6,870!5,8DO/4,860/3,970
Carbon dlsulIide Ethyl alcohol. Glass (lIght cro~n') : Water.
~"
6,278.1
.0
D,
:1
en
1. 610 1,35D 1.510 I .
I, 61 7
1.3GO 1. 512 1.331
3~9
1.629 I . ~1(j3 1,515 1.333
1.654/ 1.702 1.3G7 1.374 1,531 1.521 1.337 1.344
I
5,8DO.0
D, E
Iron
5,269.6
b,
Ma.gnesi urn
5,183.6
b,
Fable 110
5, I 72.7
Iron
b,
~
.
Iron, -rnagncsi LIm
5, 167.4 '1,957.6
F
Hydrogen
4,861,3
d
Iron
4,668 4,383.6
Hydrogen
4,340.5
0'
Iron
4,325.8
G
Iron, calci um
'1,307.9
q
Cal,::ium.
4,226.7
h
Hydrogen
11
I Calcium.
I
I
Optical Constants of Metals and Semiconductors
5, I 6D. 0
Iron
b,
f\
B
7,621
Q
C
177
'I, I 01.7 ~)
,DG3. ()
~,S3;3.
(;
Substance
Aluminium Antimony • Bismuth .• Cesi urn . . • Chromium . . ' 0 ' Cobalt (G,OOO A)
Copper Gold Iron . Lead •
Substance
1.28 3.4 1.78 O. 3~1 3.5D 2.21 0.62 0.42 2 36 01
2:
3.66 1.63 1.57
IMercury .. Nickel Plati
nilIn
•
3.70
Potd~sium
1.26 1.83 4. I 6. G5 1.3(; 1,73
Seleniulll . Si Ii CO !I . , S;Ivor.,. Tin . . '0' Tung-sten (5,780 A) Zinc . . • . . . . .
12
I. 62 1.7D 2.07 o OG8 2:85 4.24 0.18 1.12 2.7G 2.12
2.71 I. 86 2. 12 21 1 221 0.114 20.1i ·1.03 O.D8 2.GO
0:
Notes. I. The values of the opti cal constants gi ven I n the table refer to the wavelength ),=5,890 A. unless otherwise indicated. 2. The constants nand k are sOmetimes calIed the index of relrac. tion and the Index of absorption, respectively.
12
3m{.46
178
ell. V. OPTIcS
Table 1n
Index of Refraction cf G"scs
l
Gas or vapouJ
ref r::cti
i il
1>1 (ij]
I
I
:-1'----
I. OOOGOI;
J\ceiylcnc Ai r AmnJonia BCIlZL'lJe
inde'
II Mercurv
(H)(l~~):! II A\c(ll:l1lc' ~\Ji tro,;.',\'ll 1.()(J]SI:lIIJOx:>"F~\'IJ . . . I. Ol)CH50 I, .sCICli! "
Carbon dioxi de Carbon 1etraclJloridc Chlorofurm . . . . Helium. . . . • . Hydrogcn . . . . . Hydrogen disulUde
I.OOJ 'IS.ulfur de 1. qu 1 '. II' T clluri 11!11 . 1. UOOIJJJ "V"ter VdI'CJllr I. 000 i J(j Zinc . . • . I.IJOO GIl II
I
are for a v..'avC'1cng-th corresponding 10 the ycllo\'\! lilll' of sodium (D). and arc corrected for a density at 0° C and 7GO mrn Hg pressure by (fOf
p
rndex of Refraetio:1 of Some Solids and Liquids (at 15° C fer the D-Iine of Sodium Relative to Air)
r:~r~~:~ Ii Index of
III
Diamond Ice 1\11 ca Sugar
.:I
Turaz
SUl)st
I
I n
rcl"r:lctiof1
'''' -III---ro",-
Solids
-'cT
"c.
<::l
h
~
I
i
x
l
I C)
X -CO
\
I
--"---------
_ _S_'l_II_)S_i_a_n_('_e_,_ _,_ _
~
('-or-.. ~:;<
the given l:ras).
Table 112
I
10
~ ....."::)
IJ
Note. The values of the indices of refraction "given in the tahle means of the formula n - 1 =const
"',...,,...,"
Index of refracti on
I. U00933 I.OIi(H41 I .II002D7 I.OOOn2 1.001565 1 . UU 0737 1.002495 1.000257 1. U02U50
I .
1. OUO:j77 Ii
'"
179
TABLES AKD GRAPHS
i .:3 I , I .51;-1 . (,0 I' I .51; !I :.OJ ~
1 ,17 1: 33 1. ,13 1.47
c;:::'.':::
IDM':"":'I'-'~
c::
........ ':'1---"'.:;1'-
Y:;..-<
-I' ~;' ~ L'":: ,') ,:":
I
•
I co
1.0
X
I
I
I
L,": '.;:
I I I :;~
~--\--\~-~ ~~~
\
I
I I
;
C~'=2X)
"'"1'''-;-['_:-:'_ --< _ _ ~ -:'-)
I I
"
C0
I n I':: I':") I.() U')
1_------
_ "1"'--!"'7'1
008
::s"-;<
CC".C
,-=' __
O~'lC'
I,~
CD
1I
(")7:'1--<(>1
I
Liquids Aniline, Benzene Canad:] CarLon
I
I
1. ;:)3
.: I
Etll)'i ,Ilco]'ol
1.110 1 . 3(;:2
],,'1
_ _ _ _ II
CI
I. 51 G
..c:
.fiOI I. S3:l
t.o
1.40 i .,11
,-:.; ~J
J
I. ';:32
'=''1::;)"r ::'1-
Oils
1.590 1. 5114:I, Cedar n LIt .
. I . ,
ChlorofoflTl
1,333
11
G! "
;?;
cj
'c 0
"
(",;
-
~
"
0
:.-~
,-
-
"r.·.
;.J
J 2'
=-- -
-~-
--
-
"S:
18~
iI
CH. V. OPTICS
Table 114 Diffuse Reflection of Some Materials in White Light (in %) Materi al
Cardboard. whi te • yellow Cheeseclot h. .. Fatty clay (yellow) . Materials coated wi th whi te pai nt . . Materials coated with yellow paint . Moist earth . Oil-paper (I layer) . (2 layers) •
60- 70 30 1G
Paper, blotting chocolate colour light bllle _ .. ordinary whi te . yellow . Traci ng paper . • . . Velvet. black . . • . Wood (pine) . • . . .
40 8
22 35
II
Emission Spectra of Some Metals (in Aluminiuml copp.. er c (arc 1 n (ar ) vacuum)
~cE
-c E
Wavelength,
6,S63 5,893 5,351 4,861
A
.", ~§ :J(])
O'i::
17.3 21.7 2G.5 32.7
:g E':?~ Z'=:;::
~~E
5,889.970 3,261
----
3,036
3,093
3,274
3,131
5,895.930 3,4 ()-\
3,072
3,944 v
4,023 v
3,650
3,466
3,345
3,962 v
4,063 v
4,046 8 v
3,611
4,680b
4,663b
5 , 105. 5 gl4 ,078 . I v
3,982 v
4,722 b
5,057 g
5,153.3 g 4,358.3 v
4,413 b
4,811 b
5,696 y
5,218.2 g 4,916. ,I bg
4, G78 b
4,912 b
5,723 y
5,700
4,959.7 g
4,7~9.~)
I
5,782. I y 5,460.7 g
5,085.8
(
5,782.~
5,333 g
4
25 GO- 70 25 22 0.4 40
~29. 51
-37 -45 -54.51
~~
-126 -162 -207.5 -253.5
Q)
co .... ~ ~.::b.D
V:J';:..
I
52.9
l
~¥: ~
100.3
E~ ~ ~c~
r-o._bn
6.75 8.86 9.65 9.37
"ray in the solid. p - the density. For Ii 'lui ds and soluti ons ~"~t= Ipe ' where e is the angle of rotation of the plane of polarisation, 1- the path length of the ray ill the liquid or solutioll. c- the concentratIon by weig-ht, equal to the Ilulllbcr of grams of solute per 100 g of solution. For pure liquids e= I_ 2. The negalive sign indicates that the rotatioll is clockwise if one looks at the liqUid from tIle si de of the source.
5,769.6 ii,
5,790~ J
6,152 0
Notes. The rotation of the plane of polarisation is characterised by the specific rotation ["]t. For solids ["]1=-"- . where" is the angle to of rotation of the plane of polarisation. t-t'he path length of the
Zinc (;:1\'12 in vacuum) -'--_ _~
3,126
~~E-c
I Cadmium (arC)
3,248
I
f-o __ u
I
Sodium Mercu ry (i n flame) lamp) I
(mercury
3,083
Table 115 Speciflz Rotation of the Plane of Polarisation for Different Wavelengths at 20° C
- - - - - , - - ,",-\
I
ft.)
I
70-80 13
"
50
~
Reflection
Paper, bro\\'tl . . . . .
2,1
Table 116 I
I
Materi al
181
TABLES AND GRAPHS
4,925 gb 6, I 03 0 6,3620
5,379 g 6,438.Sr
6,232.00
J
Notes. 1. The wavelengths are measured in air at 760 mm Hg pressure.
15°C and
2. The colours ot the visible li nes are denoted by the first letter the corresponding colour. . of 3. The brightest lines are underli ned
13
3aK.46
1
CH. V. OPTICS
182
Table 117 Luminous Efflciency, Efficiency and Luminance of Some Lig'ht Sources
Luminance. ralldelas/m 2
'rype of Lamp
TABLES AND GRAPHS
I
Table 119
•
Typical Characteristics of Photoelectric Cells
f
Type of cell
UB-I 50-watt,
carhon fila-
ment, vacuum
bO-watt. tungstcn Ii· lament, vacuum 50-watt gas-Ii lIed. tung<.;ten Ii lament 50 lJ·watt, gas-Ii Ilcd. tungsten fi lament 2,00 O-watt. gas-fi lied, tungsten fi lament Voltaic arc Lu:ni nescent lamp
5XIO,'i
0.4
2.5 10
1.6
2,460
15X 1OS-20X f 0 5
10
1.6
2,685
5x I 0'
17.5
2.8
2,900
10'
21.2 25
3.5
3,020 4,000
I 3 X I 0"- 1" X 10' 15X 10 ' (crater)
40
G.4
4
183
Cathode
Filling
Integral sensitivity, p. amp/lumen
I I
Dark current, I'- amp
Operati ng voltag'e, v
Oxygen·cesium
Vacuum
20
O. I
240
ditto
Inert gases
75
O. I
240
80
0.01
240
80
O. I
240
0.1
240
UB-3 UB-4
Uf-I
1.5XIO'
Note. The luminous effidenr!.' is the ratio of ihe total radiant flux to the power ,oj" the currcnt in the light :"Otlfce. The effiriency'of a light SOurce is t1:e ratio of the luminous flux to the current in ihe source.
CUB-3
Antimony- Vacuum -cesium
CUB·51
Table 118 Electron Worl, function and Photoelectric Threshold of Varipus Substances Work function. ev
Substance
G.13-G.09
Water Cuprous oxide • Mica . . . .. Sodium chloride Silver bromide . . . Thor;[;m on tUIlg".,ten Sodium on tunt-rs1cn Cesi urn on tungsten • Cesium on platinum. Barium on tungsten . . • . . . .
5.15 4.8 4.2 3.7-5.14 2.62 2. 10 1. 36 1. 31
I.l
Barium ox; de on ox; di sed tungsten . . . .
.
.
1.0-1.1
Photoelectric threshold. A 2,025-2,040 2,500 2,548 2,950 3,350·2,400 4, '130 5,900 9,090 8,950 11,300
CUB-4
ditto
Uf·3
Oxygenwcesi urn
.
I Uf·4
Inert
100
gases
12,400-11,300 I
13B*
..... Table 120 Typical Characteristics of Photoconductive Cells
Light-sensi ti ve material
<J)
C.
»
I-<
<1>C·A4 <1>C·AI <1>C-52
I
I
<1>C-K2 <1>C-KI
I
'Vi ro·
"'"
<J)
Polycrystalli ne cadmium sulfide . • . • . . . . .
0;;0
4x7
I
IIXII
I 3. 5X7. 2 I 3.5X7.2
<1>CK·MI
I
Single crystal cadmi um sulfide . . . • . • . . .
I
28
I
>~,
~:::
0.>-
C-Il>
~
::J t:
•
~.-
ill
a~ 8 E~~ 'lIu,-2~1
--'C)°~OQ.) C 1---, - - OJ
E~~
"2'g ~ ~
'"
~~§
t:<J)
•••.
u
-
~Q;'
"'~ V)ro
······1
Lead sulfide Bismuth sulfide
~E
:;::E
E CD >
~;j
•
,L-
eU:::.:.. u
>.
'"
'Vi
en
2~~cUbD
~I~
<0>
{/) (j)::i..t::
:€ ;::·v ~o~
10'·10'
500
15
1.2
0.015
I 05·l 0 7
1,000
50
4
0.0\
2,50 0 3,000
300 400
35 140
0.0012 0.014
9 :<
10' 10'
I I
I
0
'"0
::!
fh
I
10 12
Notes. I. In view of the non·linear relation between i and the flux the table gives the value of for which the specific sensitiVity has been determined. The table gives the mean values (for a given current) of the speci fic sensitivity at I lux. 2. The integral sensivi ty of the type <1>CK·MI photoconductive cell is 2 ampflumen at 10 lux and 60 v. 3. The current in the photoconductive cell depends on the temperature: it =:!:.io (I +ot), where i o is the current at O°C, it - the current at tOC, and ~_ the mean temperature coefficient of the current.
.~
-ot""
Table 121 Typical Characteristics of Barrier-layer Photoelectric Cells Integral sensilivi ty, p. amp/lumen
Sensi· live area, cm 2
Llght·sensi tive material
TYre
typical samples
I
best samples
Iniernal resist ,nce, ohms
E Wei·
ency, %
...,
:.-
I
K·5 K·IO K·20 <1>3CC·Y2 c!)3CC·Y3 '1':')CC-Y5 (j)3CC·YIO
· .......... · .......... · .......... sulfi de . . . • . . • • . .........
Seleni um " "
Silver "
"
"
". : : : : : : : : I sui [ide . . . . . . . i
Thallium Crystalli ne si licon (wi tb admi xlure 01 boron)
.....
250 250 250 4,000 4,000 4,0 00 4, 000 o,OOO-G,OOO 15,000
500 500 500 1,000-8,000 7,000-R,000, 7,000-8,000 7, 000·8, ADO 10,000
I
,",000
I
5 10 20 2 3 5 10 2
I 0'-5X I O' I 0'-5X I 0' I 0'·5X 10' I. 5X I 01-3X 10' I X I 0'·2 X I A' 7XI02-1.4XI01 4XI0'-8xI0'
1·8
1·10
-I -I -I -I -I -I I 11-13
tll t" tTl
[Jl
:.-
z
t:I
Cl ;>:l
:."0
u;
Notes. 1. The i nteg-ral sensitivity is gi ven lor the photocurrent in the short·ci rcuited cell. 2. The integral sensitiVity tor the silicon cell refers to an area of G.5 ern'. 3. A system of silicon photoelectric cells is called a solar b:lItery. It is believed that the efficiencY of a 'solar battery can be brought up to 22%. 00
<1\
':',..............~---
_......
T !
FUNDAMENTAL CONCEPTS AND LAWS
187
The motion of the electrons in the atom may be approximately described as motion in circular or elliptical orbits around the nuc\pus (Fig. 80). The,e orbi ts are called stat ionary orbits. When an electron revolves about tlj.C nucleus in
C HAP T E R VI
;'
,.-
STRUCTURE OF THE ATOM AND ELEMENTARY PARTICLES
;'
'"
~
~
I
I
I
.I
,,
,
FUNDAMENTAL CONCEPTS AND LAWS
1. Units of Charge, Mass and Energy in Atomic physics
The unit of mass is equal to 1/16 of the mass of the oxygen isotope (see p. 188) with an atomic weight of 16: I atomic unit of mass=1.66xlO-2< g.
\ \ \
\
\
\ \
\
!.
,, ,
.... ....
f/=! ,"-, { ,_ ....:
... ...
,
... ....
"... ....
_-, ... /
... ....
....
,,
,
"
\
\
\
\
\
I
\
\
\
\
,
•
\rd
I
:f/=J
If/=4.' I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
-
.' ......... ----,,-" '"
/
t
.-I
I
,.I
.- '" .. _-----,--"... ...
.....
,,
,
,..-- .... ..., '"
I \
\
~
The mass of the lightest atom - the hydrogen atom - is equal to 1.008 in this scale. The unit10f energy is the electron-volt (ev); it is equal to the energy acquired by an electron in falling through a potential difference of I volt. 1 ev = 1.6 X 10-19 joule = 1.6 x 10- 12 erg.
r
I
(
.....
/'
Fig. 80. Possible electronic orbits in hydrogen atom (tlie radii of the orbi ts are in the ratio of the squares of the integers 1 :2 2 :3 2 :4 2 etc.).
a stationary orbit it does not radiate. The radii of the sta-
2. The Rutherford-Bohr Model of the Atom
The centre of th~ atom consists of a posi ti vely charged nucleus around WhICh electrons revolve in definite orbits. The mass of the atom is concentrated primarily in the nucleus. The nucleus of the hydroi~en atom is cal1ed a proton. The mass of the proton equa Is 1.67x 10- 24 g; that of the eleetron-9.11xIO- 2'g(ljl,836th part of the proton mass). The charge of the electron is equal to the elementary charge. The charge of the nucleus is equal to the number of the element in the Mendeleyev periodic system. The number of electrons in a neutral atom is equal to the charge of the nucleus,
'" I \
~,
----- -, ..... ....
I
I I I
I \
~
;'
I
I
o
~
I
I
The unit of charge is the elementary charge: e = 1.60 X 10- 19 coul.
,,-
I
1
-><---- - ---
~'
tionary orbits are determined from the condition h
mvrl/= 2:n: n,
o
~)
(6,1)
where m is the mass of the electron, v - its velocity, r l/ ~ the radius of the orbi t, h - Planck's constant, n = I, 2, 3, .... Every stationary electron orbit (in other words, every stationary <;tate of the atom) corresponds to a definite value 01 the energy (energy level), The energlf {:!ue!s (V:',,) and the radii of the circular orbits vl the hydrogc:n atom can be computed by the formulas;
188 CH. VI. STRUCT. OF THE ATOM AND ELEMENT. PART.
Wn = r ll
=
2Jf}me'
fi2Ji2"" •
(6,2)
n 2 h2 L[Jt2
me 2 •
(6,3)
An atom radiates or absorbs energy in the form of electromagnetic waves when an electron jumps from one stationary orbit to another. The magnitude of the emitted or absorbed quantum (portion) of energy hv is given by the condition hv = W 2 - Wt> (6,4) where W, and W 2 are the energy levels of the electron in the atom before and after the change of orbits. According to contemporary views, the stationary orbits do not actually represent the trajectories of electrons in the atom. Modern physics has a somewhat different approach to the prob lem of the struelure of the atom. However. the concept of atomic energy levels remains valid.
r
FUNDAMENTAL CONCEPTS AND LAWS
Electrons in complex atoms are grouped in shell,. A includes a certain number of eleelronic orbits. At most electrons can move in the same orbit. The shell of least radius can contain at most two trons (one orbit). This shell is called the K-shell. The
189
shell two elccnext
3. The Atomic Nucleus and the Electron Shells The nucleus of an atom of any element is made up of protons and neutrons. The neutron is an electrical Iv neutral particle whose mass is apprOXimately equal to the mass of the proton. Nuclei of the same element may contain different numbers of neutrons, and hence may have different masses. Elements which differ only in the number of neutrons in the nucleus are called isotopes. The mass number (M) of an isotope is the whole number which is nearest to the atomic mass of the isotope. The number of neutrons in the nucleus is
N=M -Z, where Z is the nuclear charge. The proton and the neutron are collectivelv called nucleons (nuclear particles); inside the nucleus these parttcles are mutually transformed one into the other. The density of the nuclear matter is extremely high (about 100,000,000 tons/cm'). A nucleus IS denoted by the symbol of the correspondin d chemical element with the atomic number as a subscript and 2' the mass number as a superscript (for example. Alar 2
13 AI ' stands for aluminium with atomic nUlmber 1313 nd a mass number 27). .
.-
Fig.
81.
Diagram of eleclron shells of tbe atom.
shell !L-shell) can contain up to eight electrons. the following shell (M-shell) - up to eighteen electrons. Th~ third shell is subdivided into two subshells iVl] and M." which can contain up to eight and ten electrons, respectively (Fig. 81).
4. Nuclear Transformations When a nucleus s formed by bringing together a certain number of protons and neutrons the rna,;s of the resulting nucleus is less than the sum of the masses of the component protons and neutrons. This dif1'erence is ca lIed the mass deficit of the nucleus. The energy reledlsed when neutrons and [Jrotons combine to form a nucleus is called the binding enerfl:!J of the nucleus (E). In computations one usually deals with the quantity E;M, i.e., the blllding energy per nucleon. fhe average value of the quantity EjM for heavy nuc leI is taken equal to 8x106 ev,
.....
<1
190 CH. VI. STRUCT. OF THE ATOM AND ELEMENT. PART.
. Some heavy !1l1clei (uranium, thorium, radium) spontaneously dlslntegrate with the formation of new nucle: and the emission of a-particles, electrons and high-energy photons (v-rayssee .the . e~ectromagnetic spectrum). This property is called radlOactl vtt y. The law of radioacti \'e decay is t
-y
r
i
(6,5)
N=N o2 where No is the ori~inal number of nuclei present at time t =0, N ~ the number of nucl,:,i left at time t, T - the half lite, equal to the period of time at the end of which half of the atoills of the radioactive material will have disintegrated. .
191
TABLES AND GRAPHS
5. Wave Properties of Matter Every moving particle possesses wave properties. For example, when an electron passes through. a me.tal film we obtain a diffraction pattern similar to the dIffraction patterns of X-rays and V-rays (Fig. 82). The wavelength of a particle is determined by the relation
'A=~.
(6,6)
mv
where m is the mass of the particle, v - its velocity, and h ~ Planck's constant.
, TABLES AND GRAPHS
t
Energy Levels of the Hydrogen Atom The energy levels are calculated by means of iormula 16.2) by substituting ior n the successive integers I, 2. 3, 4. etc. UtiliSing the energy level diagram it is easy to calculate the irequenl'les of the spectral Ii nes of the hydrogen atom by means of formula [oerpv,ev (6,4).
cj Fig. 82. Oi ffrJclioll oi 0.) X-rnys by a polycrystalli ne gold fi 1m, uJ electrons by a polycrystalli ne gold fi 1m.
Nuclear transformations may be ind uced arti ficla Ily by bombarding elements with protons, neutrons, helium nuclei and v-rays. Such transformations are called nuclear reactions. Nuclear reactions mav lead to the formation of new rad ioactive isotopes, which cia !Jelt occllr naturally on the earth. This phenomcnon is called artificial radioactivity. Nuclc,ar transformatiom are utilised to relea-;e nuclear energy by the fission (splitting) of heavy nuclei (for example, 23 U ,) or by the synthesis (fUSIOn) of light nuclei (for example. hydrogen nuclei). The synthesis of Ii~"ht nuclei requires extremely high temperature. (of the n,-der nf Illi I lions of degrees). Such reactions are ca! led I her fllunur.:!t;ar.
When electrons jump to the level n= 1 the atom emi ts a series of Ii nes called the Lyman series; the Ii nes of thi s series lie in the ultraviolet reg-ion of the spectrum. Upon transi tion to the level n=2 the ii nes of the Balmer series are emi tted (four. Ii nes of this series lie in the visible part of the spectrnm. the remainder-in the ultraviolet.) Upon transi lion to the level ,,=3 the lines of the Paschen series are emi tted Ii nirared region). The numbers near the short arrows in each series i ndi cate the o longest wave· length Ii A) in the given series (l A=IO-'cm).
I.
14
IJ .-/1 II
JfJ
iSu/mer !Jenes
9 8
7
6 S
J 2
o .L----l...L.'-Fig. 83. Energy level diagram of hydrogen atom.
L?mufJ ff(fe~:,
-=-n'(
T
CH. VI. STRUCT. OF THE ATOM AND ELEMENT. PARr.
I
3 "
6.940 11
Na
III
22.997 19
IV
39.100 29
4
, I'•
V
Mg 24.32
7
.
18
II
Ag
•
107.880 55
,
18
CS
18 8 1
132.91 79
I
•
18
31
Au
18 8 1
197.2
I:
Fr
i
59
I
l i~ Nd
140.13
1
1
"
91
18
Ii I
Pa 231
, "~~ U 1
: TI 2
44.96 31
3
"•
Table 122
t
t
56
or
TABLE
ELEMENTS
GROUPS
57
I
Ii" I
Hg 200.61
,
2
18
nAc
226.05
61
11
Ii
2
62
•
150,43
1
8
13
Np
: [237)
• 1
As 74.91
1
I
41
:~ Nb
11 18 8 1
92,91 5
51
1:
Sn 1
73
I
2
I
n,
Pb
209.00
:~ Pu
~ [242J
94
2 13 8
1
Se "
li Tc I [99] 1
52
,
1 13
43
28
NI
!
I
44
Ru
il
1
, 2
""•
" Pd
I
: 102.91
106.7
1
Xe
" 18
77
1
"
Os
31 18
• 190.2
Ir
• 193.1
1
78
1
15
,
Ii !
1
PI
'·i·
19U3
,., 8 1
I II 31
" 8 1
86
85
",
8 2
18
131.3 76
8
"
0
46
11
126.91
Re
7
36
8380
,
45
Rh
31
Po
31 '8
AI
Rn
1
210
1
[210]
222
8 18 31
18 8 1
(Pa) lU)
2
63
•
'lANTHA l 64 ; '
:: Eu
ii
: 152,0
1
1 8 11 31
18
• 1
95
Gd
• 156.9
..
243
• , 1
ACTI
1
8
15
Am
:i
11 Cm : (243]
96
1
tilDES
8
1
66
8
,
Te
:: Dy
159.2
2
1 8
67
i: Ho
162.46
1
68
8
:: Er • 164.94 , 16/.2
1
1
69
1 8
:3
1
,
70 71 :i•• Vb 31"• Lu " , 173-04 174.99 • 1
9 31
Tu
• 169.4
8 1
1
1
N 1 DES
15 31
"
1
65
(l7
, 2
11
Bk [245)
Ii Cf ! [246]
98
1 8
99
"iij En •
100 1 101
Fm
I
IMd
I 256 255 1 253 NUMBERS OF STABLEST ISOTOPES
I I
t I
102
No
ATOMIC
I NUMBER
I
t
I
8
1,
54
1 13
,
16
58.69
I
"•2 186.31
", "
1
15
58.94
Kr
1
75
1 II
183.92 6 84
27
Co
53
1
31
I
"• 101.7
Te :: 127.61
t.
55.85
79.916
I
42
26
Fe
Br
'78.96 :
W
,
25
-
Ar
35
1
74
BI
!
207.21
"•1
1
I 2
Mn
1
18
39.944
35.457
: 54.93 34
6
",
5 18
i
1 I)
31 18
180.88 83
82
24
52.01
CI
I
I
8
20.183 "
17
S
1
10
Ne
19.00
1
n066
Cr
F
1
16 6. 8 1
9
0 16
1
6
11
:: Ta
•
18
121.76
10
8
95.95
Sb
I
2
He 4-003
Mo
8
1
93
11
1
,
,
2
18
~; Sm
1
1
•• Ii lTh}
: 227
60
72.60
178.6 I
204.39 1 89
33
I
" TI Ii
+
•
88
92
I
138.92 81
5
~8
:: Hf'
3
I: 50.95 V Ge
72
9
P 30.975
23
118.70
2
15
2
~"
I
VIII
VII
N 14.008
I
50
In :: 114.76
1
!
1
91.22 I
',8
2
137.36 80
Ii I
I
7
SI5
40
Zr
1'8
• :: La •
1 18
14
32
1
Y
C 12.010
1
88.92 . 3 49 18
Cd
6
47.90
I
103
lH)
28.09
I: 69.72
39
1I2.41
,
Ga
2
48
Ba
~ 238-07
V
22
1
Zn
v"".
2
: Sc
• 140.92 • 144.27 1
21
2
nRa
:: Pr
Th 232.12
30
1
I
Ce
90
20
18
!"
(223]
08
I
26.98 :
I
1 18
•
87
X
AI
21
13
2
8
IX
23
"
"8
1
6
I 1
2
I85.4847
VIII
10,82
12
l
1 18
B
23 22
9.013
65.38 II •I: Sr 38 87.63
VI Rb VII
5
63.54 37
~
Be
2
Cu
1
5
4
l Ca I 40.08
K
IV
TABLES AND GRAPHS
VI
'. 1
~
Li
"'
-
I
1.0080
II
2
II
1)
H
MEtfOHEV'EV'S PERloblc ELEMENT
I
, 1-
oI
-
~
PERIODS SERIES
'.~
SYMBOL
I AT 0M I C ......=:.:-~"--'-' 253' WflGHT ElECTRON
SHEl.\,.--S..
tal ns the symbol of an element; above i t ~the atomic number. below most Widespread isotopes). The columns oHligures gIve the number
J94
CH. VI. STRUCT. OF THE ATOM AND ELEMENT. PART.
Table 123 Relative Abundance and Activity of Isotopes of Some Metals
T , ~
TABLES AND GRAPHS
Table 124 Atomic Weight, Relative Abundance and Activity of Sonie ___~ ~_L_i-"g~h~t_lsDtopes. --, _ Element
Number of protons
EJement
Number of
neutrons
Relative abundance.
%
Half life
26
32
i
Co
eu
I
26 27 28 29 30 31
27
29
33 28 :!9 30 .31 32 33 34 29 31 32 33 34 3'"
3G 37
-
Type of activity
H D
-
6.04
91. 57 2. II 0.28
100
-
-
-
09.48 30.52
-
7.8 hr 8.9 min stable 4 years stable
He
0+ I'
~ ~Il :0
"'0
T
Fe
I 1 I 2
~+
C
6
(J
weight
~
7. 7, 7. 7. 7·
~
7, ~
ij
-
~+ ~+ ~+ ~+
-
-
o
8
1.00~t
7 R 7
2.01H 3.0170 3.0t70 4.0039 5.0 t:17 Ii. 0209 to. 11.01 12.0039 13.007 Ii H.OOn loS. ()n 7,~
B
1 G. ()()(I()
1 2 3 4
4
9 10 II 13 13 Al 14 1S 16 /Vote. ~ - - electron. nucleus. n -neutron.
I. 3 -,
9 ~. () 1.1
stahle
76 . 0.04 0.20
25.99-14 26.9~J07 27.990~
tOo
28.9892 ? + - posi tron.
n
a
, 1
years
l~ec
stable
31 "sec 7 sec stable 2.;) min (i.7 "( - gamma-rays.
Some Artificially Produced Elements
ij+ .,+
v
10"~~o sec
~+
I'
8+
r...-
. 8 sec 0.8 sec 21 min stobIe
10'-t D~.
ot
activity
12.5years stable
~lOO
17.0045 18.0048
Atomici number
Name of element
61 85 87 93
Promethium (Pm) Astatine (At) Francium (Ff) Neptunium (Np)
94
Plutoni urn (PU)
95 96 97 98
Americium (Am) Curium (em) Berkelium (Uk) Californium IU)
243. 245. 24ii, 247 244, 241i. 248
99 100
Einsteinium (En) Fermium (Pm)
2[)3 255
-
1
cr. ~ helium
Table 125
l\1ass numbers
.'
7. (4~-
:3
-
145.1 H7,148.1'19,1;;0.IGI 21Hi. 209,~IU.2tl 212. 221, 222, 223 231,232, 234,235,236, 237.238, 2:32,23-1. 2:Jli. 237, 239,240, 241
Note. See note to the follOWing table.
99.98 0.02 2
Ty!'e
Half Ii Ie
~~E;.
c'
0 1
:::
~.g*
Atomic
5 Ii
.
" 47 days 18. I hr 8 days 270 " 72 " s(able 5.3 years 1.75 hr 7.9 min 8.1 sec 3.4 hr 9.92 min stable 12.8 l1r stable 5 min
195
101 102 jVotf? is given
24 ')
30 vears
~.3·hr
2 I min 2.15XIO' Years 5'XIO'years
'l.l ')
2:J~:2:19~~-1(J·.241.242.243,244 10' years
2:l8,240,241.242.243.2H,2~5 GOO years
5 days 2,IOOyears
Mendelevium (Mv) 2,)(; Nohelium (No) 2G3 Tbe mass numher of thE' i .c:olo;~c \Vi tll the grC';:ltest in boldface type.
half life
Inti
CII. VI. STI'
Tahle 126 Elementary and Non-Elementary Particles Particles which, according to present-day notions, are not cornpcsed of lJlore fundamental particles are called elementary.
Energies of Some Particles Particle
197
Table 127 Energy. Mev
Mass Name
Maxi mum energy of i3 - (Th C -> Th C') • " ij- (Th C" -> Pb) Energy of cr-parti cle (Th C' -> Pb) • • a-particle (Th C' -> Th C") • photon of "(-radiation . " cosmic ray mesons (secondary radiation)
Average lifetime, sec
Symbol
Particles produced in accelerators
Elementary
Protons . . Neutrons .
particles
Photon
h'l
j',
v v
Kcutri no Anti neutri no
Electron
P-,
Posi tron
e+,
L-mesons
;+
0 <0.001 <0.001 I J
0 0 0 -I +1
210 210 275 275 300
+1 -I 0
9GG 9GG 965
+1 -I 0
stable in vacuum 2.22XIO-' 2.22XIO-' 2.53XIO-· 2.53XIO-· IXIO-'·;-5XIO->5 1.27XIo-a l.27XIO-' 1.3XIO-'o
1.007GO
1,83G
+1
stahle
1.00899
J,839
0
7XIO'
10- 3 0- 3 1 155
O. I 155 0.151 O.IDI O. 1GD
~+
.
_0
1'UclCOllS:
0 0 0 '5.4 15.
n.
11.+ IJ--
K-mesons
K+ K!(~,
1{2 0
pro Ion
P. II'I
neutron
n,
tl
1
u
+1 -I
Antiproton
p
1,836
-I
Anti neutron Hyperons
n
1,839 2,181.5 2,327 2,327
0 0 +1
Non-elementary particles
1\0 1:+
,,1f2
stable
-I
3.7XIO-IO 3.4XIO-u 3.4XIO-u
Deuteron
d,
+1
stable
t, 1'3 'I
3.016
+1
d, IJc~
4.003
+2
17.G9X X3,GOO stable
1
2.014
1t+~mesons tt- -mesons
p.+-mesons -mesons . . . . " '" . Photon of 7-radiation (i 11 dc','ay of ;-:o-lllc:;ons) • r-radi'ation (in decay of deuterolls) • • r-radiation (in decay of cr-particles)
IJ.-
I
GO 0-700 500-G50 I GO-360 300-400 90 25 la-GOO up to 30Q 500-GOO
Notes. J. The nuclear reactions in which particles of the given energy are produced are gi ven in parentheses. 2. The i ndi cated energi es of particles produced in accelerators were obtained in the USSR in the G-meter proton synchrotron (as of July 1957). More recently protons of energy 10' Mev were produced In the high-energy proton synchrotron in Dubna. The maximum par.. ticle energy obtained to date is about 3X10' Mev (proton synchrotron in Geneva).
stable in vacuum
Triton Alpha-particle
2.25 I. 79 8.95 G.20 3.20 10-- 3 -10'
Notes. I. Mesons and hyperons are produced in the collisions o[ high-energy particles (for example. protons and cr-particles in the
Table 128 Energy of a Quantllm of Radiation of Different Types Wavelength
I
~
1 mm 300 I" I I"
8,OOOA o 7,000 oA G,200 A o
5. oon 0 A 4, 000 A o
3,000
A
Energy, ev
\Vavclength
Energy, ev
1.22XIO-3 4. I Xl 0- 3 1 22 52 1.75 1.% 2.44 3 OG 4. 10
I,OOO/,.. 100 0 A 100A
J.22XIO J.22XIO' J. 22;<1 0' J.22XIO' 1.22;<10 5 I. 22)<10 7
I:
I A
0
O. I A o 0.01 Ao 0.001 Ao 0.0001 A
1.22XI0 8
.,... 198
CH. VI. STRUCT. OF THE ATOM AND ELEMENT. PAHT. Binding Energy
On the abscissa axis (Fig'. 84) arc plotted the mass numbers, on the ordinate axis - the binding' energy ElM per nucleon in electron volts. Knelear encrg'V can be released either by the fission of heavy
~ !le/illm(7!lIfV),_ _-_~ 8
I ~
I
'TABLES AND GRAPHS
199
Synthesis of Helium from Hydrogen Tbe production of helium nuclei by the synthesis (fusion) of hyd. rogen nuclei is of immellse thc(lrctical
I
8.8111er
7
1
{/;'i11l1i/1Ii(:;:J11Ievj
8 5 Reactions of Nuclear Synthesis J
Reactions of nuclear synthesis can take place ci ther at hig'h temperatures (millions of degrees) or at high field intensities (millions of voltS). The follOWing are some examples of such reactions.
C
!Jeli/edu/ll (1. IJ.9mfvJ ll-_ _-I-,--_ _........ 50
{OO
-
150
_ _+ - _ ~ . . _ . . _ .
2CO
250
11
Fig. 84. Curve of binding energy.
Iwclei or by the synthesis of light nuclei. In both cases new nuclei are produced with a binding energy ElM greater than that of the original nuclei. Examples of Nuclear Reactions Nuclear reactions are accompanied by the rclci1sc or absorption of energy. In the re:lclions g'iven below the nnmbers on the left·hand side of the equations indic;:te the energ'V absorbed, on tbe right·hand side of the equations - the energy released. in Mev.
Notes. 1. The arrows in N]ll:l/ioll G indicate th.1t 1I1C reaction ('on~ tinues spontnnco~lsly. 2. The fis:sioil of one uranium 11llc]ell~_; ]c;lds to the release oi about 200 Mev ?f encr.l':Y· The energy released by I gram of uranium equals 22X I OJ kiiowatt·bours.
~
I [
/Jnits of Radioactivity and Radiation The unit of radioactivity is the curie. I curie corresponds to the Intensitv of radiation of radon in a state of radioactive equilibrium with I gram of radium. The curie is also a measure of the quantity of a radioactive substance. A curie is a quantity of any radioactive substance which decays at the rate of 3.7XiO'o atoms per second. The roentgen is the unit of X· and ,-radiation. A roent[!.en is a: quantity of radiation which produces in I em:' of dry air at O°C and 760 nltn Hg a number of ions carrying a total of one electrostatic unit of charge of each kind (2XI 0" pairs of ions).
a:;:w.. 20:
APPENDICES
APPENDICES
The deviation L'.Ai= I Amean - Ai I is called the absolu!e en'or of a single measurement. The quantity 'A -_ ---~-------~--L'.A I L'./1 2 !\/l" • L.l n is called the mean absolute error of the measurement. Usuall'Y it is considered that Arrean - L'.A < A < Amean L'.A.
+ ... +
-+
I. I;ome Frequently Encountered Numbers n=3.1~1593 Vn=1.77245
4n=12.L16637 2 n =0.63662
e=2.718282
V2= 1.41421
13 =
n 2 = 9.86960
1°=0.017453 radia 1'=0.000291 n I" 0 " = .0000048
+
mean
-
I
---
I
YI+x=I+-x 2 I
I
Vl+x=I-Z-X
is called th·c mean relative error and is
usually expressed in per cent. The result sought by the experimenter is rarely found by measuring only one quantity. It is generally necessary to measme several quantities and to calculate the desired result from a formula. The following table gives expressions for finding the absolute ane! relative errors of calculations carried out by some frequently encountered for-
1.73205
II. Formulas for Approximate Calculations
l+x=l-x
AL'.A
The ratio
0.031 0.085 0.052 0.077 0.045
< x < 0.031 < x < 0.093 < x < 0.052 < x < 0.077 < x < ' .045
mulas. Formula
Absolut~
Relative erro:
error
sinx=x
e"'=I+x
t
A13 A
perfor~edJ
An
All measurements can be only up to a certain d egree of precision. Precision is determined b' tl1 I .. the measurement. In order fo e : I.. ~st slgnIfkant Ilgure of are always possible the .. c " e chance errors which several times and 'th measur.ement should be repeated results taken. e mean arIthmetic value of all the 'd
+ A +... + An 2
fl
iA\+iB1
I B IlA -f-A1B I
m+1BT
AA
13'
n\ A
n1
j A
n_
113
AA
nm
1
\ AA
l-n n
1..1£1
Example. To determine the density of a solid one measures its volume and its mass. Assume that HIe volume has been measured with an accuracy of 1.5 % , and the mass with an accuracy of 1"/0' Then the relative error of the determined value of the density is 2.5)/0' Hence, we may write:
If a quantity A has been measured n t' As, ... , An are the results of th . d' . lmes and A" A 2 , then the mean arithmetic value eislO IVldual measurements,
= At
IAIlB+B1AI
73
III. Elements of the Theor\l of Errors
mean
\A-BI t>A 1113
A~13
The inequalities indicate tho r1 whIch the error of the t ran,e of values of x for formulas does not exceedcgn l?,L1 a IOns by the approXimate . l 10'
A
A+B l ~\ IlA+t>B
IlA+IlB
A+B
1
V (!!!-)
14
(1 _ 0.025) mean
3aK.46
<
}11_
V
<
(!!!-) V
(I mean
+ 0.025).
13
:::
202
,
APPENDICES
IV. Prefixes to the Basic Units of Measure mega (M) 10" milli (m) kilo (k) 10 3 micro (~) deci (d) 10-' nano (n) centi (c) . 10- 2 pico (p) .
I 10- 3 10-' 10-· IO- IZ
The figures in the right-hand column indicate the number of multiples 2nd sub-multiples of the basic unit which are formed by attaching the prefJxes. For example, 1 Mc/s = 10' cis; 1 mm = 10-' m. V. Uoits of Measure of Some Physical Quantities Mass ton = 10 centners = 1,000 kilograms. carat = 2 X 10-' ki logram pood = 16.38050 kilograms.
4._._.5
c;::::e.,
APPENDICES
203
Thermal Conductivity 1 kilocal/m hour degree = 2.778 X 10- 3 caljcm sec degree =
= 1.162X 10- 2 watt/em degree.
Work and energy watt-hour = 3,600 watt-sec. joule = 1 watt-sec = 107 ergs . 0.239 cal (calorie), kg m (kilogram meter) = 981 Joules. j'ilocal (kilocalorie) = 1.16 watt-hours, ~v (electron volt) = 1.6019 X 10- 12 erg=1.6019XlO- 1O joule. Power watt = 10 7 erg/sec. kilowatt = 102 kg mlsec = 1.36 hp (horsepower). Capacitance
Length 1 micron = 10- 0 m. 1 A(Angstrorn unit)=IO-8 cm . 1 X=--= 10- 11 cm. 1 inch =--= 25.40 rnm. 1 foot = 0.30480 m.
1 yard = 0.91440 m. I mile (English) = 1,609 m. I mile (nautical) = 1,852 m. I light year = 9463XI012 km.
Time year=31,.5,56,925.975 sec. day=24 hours = 1,440 min =86,400 sec. hour = 60 min = 3,600 sec. Pressure 1 atmosphere (technical) = 1 kg/cm 2= 735.66 mm Hg. 1 mm Hg = 0.001316 atm = 1,33~ dynes/cm 2= 1333 nt/m!. 1 atmosphere 6 (standard) = 760 mm Hg = 1.033 kg/cm 2 = 1.013 X 10 dynes/cm 2= 1.013 X 10' nt/m 2.
=
Temperatwe Number of degrees centigrade (DC) =--= 5/4 0 R = 5/9 CF _ 32) = =(OK - 273). Here oR denotes the number of degrees on the Reaumur scale, of - the number of degrees Fahrenheit, oK _ the number of degrees Kelvin.
1 em = 1.11 picofarad = 1.11 X 10 - '2 farad. VI. Universal Physical Constants Gravitational constant y . . 6.67x 10- 8 g-I cm 3 sec-2 6.67x 10- 11 kg- I m' sec- 2 Volume of one grammolecular weight of an ideal gas under standard conditions Vu. • • 22.4207 Ii ters Universai gas constant'R 8.31696 joule degree- I mole-I Faraday's number F . . 96.521 couljg-equiv Avogadro's number N . 6.02497 x 10 23 mole - I Boltzmann's constant k 1.38041 X 10-'6 erg degree- 1 Mass of hydrogen atom m H 1.67339 X 10- 24 g 1.67239 X 10- 2• g Mass of proton m" Mass of electron me . . . . 9.1083 X 10- 28 g Charge of electron e . . . . 4.80274 X 10- 10 CGSE 1.60202 X 10- 20 CGSM Velocity of light in vacuum Co 2.99793x 10'" cm sec-I Planck's constant h . . . . 6.62517XIO-27 erg sec Rydberg's constant for hydrogen R H • . • . • . . • 109,677,576 cm- 1 Rydberg's constant for deuterium R o 109,707.419 cm- 1 Rydberg's conshnt for helium R He 109,722.267 cm- 1
11
...... '"...
o
MKSA System of Units The following table gives the names, designations and dimensions of the most frequently used units of the MKSA system. The last two columns give the conversion factors for the CGSE and CGSM systems. For mechanical units the CGSE and CGSM systems coincide fully; the fundamental units of these systems are: the centimeter, gram (mass) and second. The two systems differ for electrical quantities. This is due to the circumstance that the fourth fundamental unit in the CGSE system is the permittivity of vacuum (8 0 = 1), and in the CGSM system - the permeability of vacuum (fto= 1). Conversion factors rela ting MKSA units to Dimensions
Unit
Quantity
J.
Length Mass . Time. Current
· \ meter, m · tilogram, kg · second. sec • ampere, amp
Velocity •. Acceleration Energy and work Force. Power
"""*'
, . . ... Ji. . . .
~:
CGSM
CGSE
Fundamenta: units
m Z
o
(.IJ
10' cm 10' g 1 sec / 10- 1
lO' em 10' g I sec 3 X 10 0
l
kg sec
1amp
2. Mechanical units 10' meter per second, mlsec \ mlsec 102 meter per second per mlsec' second. mj sec' 10' joule or watt per second, kg m'jsec'=joule joule kg m/sec 2 =joulelm 1105 newton, nt kg m'jsec 3 ;;o:joulejsec 10' watt, W
-----
'"0 '"0
n m
m
.....'
:0-
cm'sec' em/sec 2
10 2 em/sec 10' cm'sec'
ergs
10' ergs
dynes
10' dynes 10'
------~----
""!!!II
~-...
.1. Electrical units
Charge . . . . . • •. coulomb, coul Potential, e.m.!. . . . volt, v Electric field intensity . . . . vol/ per meter, vim Capaci tance . . . . farad, fd Resist ance
ohm,- ohm
amp sec=coul kg m'/amp sec'=v kg mJamp sec 3 =vjm amp'/sec'/kg m'= =amp'/sec'/v= =sec!ohm kg m'Jamp' sec3 =
1/3 X 10-'
10 lOs 10'
9 X 10 11 cm 1 '9 X 10 - 11
10-0 10'
13 X 10' 1/300
1
1
=::: v/amp
Resistivity
ohm meter, ohm m
Permittivity
farad per meter, fd!m
Magnetic !lux . . . Magnetic induction
weber, \Vb weber per square meter. wb/m' ampere per meter, amp/m'
li9XIO-ll
10"
9 X 10'
10- 11
kg m"amp sec' kg'amp sec'
1300 L3XI0-'
lOS maxwells 10< gauss
amp/m
3 X 10'
10- 3 gauss
kg m 3/amp' sec 3 = =ohm m amp' sec'ikg m 3 =fd'm
:0-
4. Magnetic units
Magnet isalion
Magnetic field inten- ampere per meter, sity . _ . . amp/m Inductance . henry, henry Permeability
henry per meter, henry/m
1
kg m 'amp'2 sec 2
10- 3 oersted
3 X 10'
amp/m 2
= ohm sec henry/tn
=
1/9 X 10-
11
1/9 X 10'3
'tl 'tl trl
Z
SZ m (J)
()
10-' em 10'
5. Optical units
Radiant flux
Luminance.
Jliuminance
. [ lumen. lumen . candela per square meter, candelajm 2 . lux, lux
candela steradian candela/m::
I
lumen-lrn:!
Note. The conversion factors given In the table tefer to the unrationaliseJ systems.
o""
00
.JJ
f SUBJECT INDEX Absorptive power (or absorptivity) of a body 169 Acceleration of free fall (tabulated data) 32 _ - uniform rotation, total 19 _ - uniformly accelerated rotation 16 ___ angular 18 ___ centripetal 19 - , tangential 18 Allowed current-carrying capacity of insulated wires 119 _ energy levels 115 Alloys of high ohmic resistance 119 Ampere 107, 133 Ampere-turns 136 Amplitude of wave 80 Angle, aperture 164 of incidence 159 - reflection 159 _ - , critical 175 - refraction 159 _ total reflection 159 _, polarisation 166 Artificially produced elements 195 Atomic unit of mass 186 Band, conduction 115 _, valence 115 Barriel-Iayer effect 168
Black body 168 Breakdown 114 Breaking stress (or ultimatE:: stress) 41, 42 Bulk elasticity 45 Caloric 52 Cal ori metrv 52 Candela 158 Candle, international 158 Capacitance 98 Ca paci tor 98 - , cylindrical 98 _, parallel plate 98 -, spherical 98 Centimeter (unit of capacitance) 98 Centre of gravity 36, 39 Change of vol ume upon mel ting 62 Charge, elementary 95, 186 -, negative 94 - , positive 94 Circuit, oscillating 151 Coefficient of friction 27, 34 internal friction 47 light, reflection 159 linear expansion 55, 68 _ _ pressure change at constant volume 57, 71 _ - resistivity, temperature 108 sound, absorption 93 - waves, reflectioll 93
r
208
SUBJECT INDEX
surface tension 56 - - volume expansion 55, 57, 67 Coerci ve force 141 Compressibility, isothermal 81 - of matter 41, 44 Conduction 56 - of a steady flow of liquid 46 Conductivity 108 -, electronic 146 , hole 116 -, induced 113 - , intrinsic 113 -, thermal 56, 70, 71 c.onstant of gravitation 27 - , Planck's 18 -, restoring force 76 Constants, emission 128 -, optical 160, 176 -, universal physical 203 Convection 55 Coulomb 94 Current, alternating 147 -, direct !06 -, induced !37 - of photoelectric cell, dark 168 - , pulsating direct 147 - , saturation 114 Currents, vortical fie! d of 134 - , eddy 139 Curve, magnetisation 140 brightness sensiof tivity 157 Deficit of nucleus, mass 189 Deformation 40 by tension (by cOIJ;pression) 40 -, elastic 40 Density 24 - . critical 54
IiIWiii-_iiin
SUBJECT INDEX
- , current 107 - , energy 99 - of liquid and vapour, equilibrium 65, 66 - - substance 24, 29-32 - - various substances 32 Depth of penetration of high frequency currents 151 Diamagnetics 140 Diameters of molecules 72 Dielectric constant 103 - of medi um 94 Difference, potential 97 Diffraction 163 - grating 163 Diopter 162 Dipole, electric 100 -, moment of electric 100 Dispersion of the index of refraction 165 - - light velocity 165 - - velocity 80 Domain 141 Dynamics 22 - of fluids and gases 45 - - rotation 25
Emissive power (or emissivity) of a body 169 Energy of elastic deformation, potential 42 - level 187 - levels of the hydrogen atom 187, 191 - of motion (kinetic ener· gy) 24 -- - nucleous, binding 189 - - position (potential energy) 24 - - system 24 Epoch angle 76 Equation of adiabat 58 - , Bernoulli's 47 - , C!apeyron-Mendeleyev's 57 - , Einstein's 167 - of sine waves 80 Equilibrium, dynamic 54 - , neutral 36 - on an inclined plane 36 - , stable 36 , unstable 36 Equipotential surface 97 Error of measurement, absolute 201 - - - , mean absolute 201 - - - , relative 201
Effective val ue of al ternating current 148 Elastic I·imit 41 Electric circuit 107 - field 94 - -, intensity of 95 Electrochemical cell 113 - equivalent 112, 123 Electrolysis 112 Electrol ytes III Electromagnetic waves 153 El ectrol11agnetism 131 Electromotive force of electrochemical cells 124 --- - - a source 107 Electron-volt 113, 186 Electrostatic field 95 Emission constants 114
Factor, power 19 Fall of bodies, free 17 Farad 96 Ferroelectric crystals 104 Ferroelectrics (seignetteelectrics) 100 Ferromagnetics 140 Field, direction of magnetic 132 - intensity, magnetic 132, 134 - , magnetic 132 - of the earth, wagnetic 141
IIIIIiI
209
First law, Newton's 22 Fluid, ideal 46 Flux, luminous 157 - of radiation 157 Focal length of the lens 160 Force 22 . centripetal 26 - , Lorentz' 133 - , magnetic 131 of a magnetic field, line of 134 - - friction 27 Formula of thin lens 160 - , Stokes' 47 - , Thomson's 152 Frequency, cyclic 76 Friction, dry 27 - , rolling '27 - , sliding 27 Gap, forbidden 115 Gas laws 57 Gauss 134 Grating interval 163 Half life 190 Heat 51 of fusion 53, 61 - - vaporisation 53, 65 Heats of combustion of fuels 73 Henry 138 Humidity, absolute 60 - , maximum 60 - , relative 60, 74 Hysteresis 140 Illuminance 158, 173 Impedance 148 I m pulse 2:3 Index of refraction 177, 178 - -- - , absolute 159 - - - , relative 159 1ndudioll, electromagnetic 137
.....iiiiiiiii;;;;;;;;;;;;;;:===---- J5l
1"! 210
-, magnetic 132 Inertia 22, 23 Infrasonic vibrations 79 Instrument, the least separation for resolution of optical 164 -, ootical 160 Insulating materials 102 Intensity, luminous 157 - of radiation 157 -, sound 83, 92 Interaction of charges 94 Interference 162 Ionisation of gases 113 - potential 113, 127 Ions 112 Isotopes 188, 194, 195 Joule 110 Kilocalorie 52 Kinematics 15 Kinetic theory of gases 58 Law, Biot-Savart's 135 , Boyle's 157 _, Brewster's 166 -, Charles' 57 _, Gay-Lussac's (the equation of an isobaric process) 57 , Hooke's 40 - , Kirchhoff's, 169 -, Lenz' 137 -, Ohm's 108 _ of Kirchhoff and Bunsen 171 _ - universal gravitation 27 _, Stefan-Boltzmann's 169 Laws of the external photoelectric effect 167 _, Faraday's 112 -, Kirchhofi's 110 Lever 36
11'_ _.-...
SUBJECT INDEX
SUBJECT INDEX
Light, natural 165 - sources (tabulated data) 182 Line, Fraunhofer 171, 176, 177 - of force 96 Loop, hysteresis 140, 146 Loudness of sound 79, 80 Lumen 156 Luminance 158 - of illuminated surfaces 172 - - light sources 172 Lux 158 Magnetic equator 141 flux 136 - induction, residual 140 - materials 139 - pole 141 - saturation 141 - susceptibility 139 - -, specific 145 Magnetisation vector 139 Magnification of magnifying glass 160 - -- microscope 162 - - telescope 162 Mass number 188 - of body 23 Maxwell 137 Mean free path 60 Mechanics IS Meter 15 Mobility of electrons 126 - - ions 112, 126, 127 Model of atom, RutherfordBohr 186 Moduli of elasticity (table) 43 Modulus of volume elasticity (or bulk modulus) 42 - , shear 41 -, Young's 40 Molecular physics 51
_
Moment of force (or torque) 25 - - inertia 26 Moments of inertia of homogeneous bodies 33 Momentum 23 Motion, accelerated 17 - , amplitude of harmonic 75 curvilinear 16 , decelerated 17 -, harmonic 75 -, mechanical IS -, non-uniform 16 - of bodies in the earth's gravitational field 19 - body, rotational 17 - ideal fluid 46 - - point, circular 17 - - viscouse fluid 47 phase of harmonic 75 rectilinear 16 rotational 17 uniform 16 uniformly accelerated 16 , vibrational or oscillatory 75 Neutron 188 Nucleon 188 Number, Avogadro's 57 - , Faraday's 112 Oersted 134 Ohm 108 Optics 157 - , geometrical 159 Orbit, stationary 187 Oscillation, period of 75 Oscillations, angular frequency of dam ped 78 , forced 79 -, damped 78 , damping constant of damped 78
211
- , electric lSI - , free 78 - , initial amplitude of damped 78 - , instantaneous value of the amplitude of damped 78 - , mechanical 75 -, periodic 75 - , phase difference of 76 Oxide cathodes 114 Para magnetics 140 Parameters, critical 66 Particles, elementary and non-elementary 196 , energy of elementary and non-elementary 197 Pendulum 77 -, mathematical 77 -, physical 77 - , torsional 77 Perfect absorber 168 Period of natural oscillations lSI Permeability 144 - , initial 141 - of medi um 132 Phase of wave 80 Phat 158 Photoconductive cell 168, 184 Photoelectric cell 168, 183, 185 - effect 167 - -, external 167 - - , internal 167 Photometry 157 Photon 166 Piezoelectric constant 101, 106 - effect 101 Pitch of screw 38 sound 79 Plane of polarisation 166
SUBJECT INDEX
212
_, inductive 148 Reaction, thermonuclear 190 _, nuclear 190, 198, 199 Reflection, diffuse 160, 180 - of light 173, 174 - , total 159 Relative brightness sensitivity 171 Resistance (ohmic) 148 - of medium 47 Resistivity of electrolytes 120 _ - metals 117 Resonance 79 - , electric 52 - , series 149 Restoring force 76 Roentgen 199 Rotation of the plane of polarisation 166, 180 - , uniform 17 _, uniformly accelerated 18
l?oint, boiling 53, 61 -
maS5 ~5
-, melting 52 _, yield 41 poise 47 Polarisation 100 - of light 165 P.ower 24 _, optical 162 Votential, absolute normal 113, 123 _, electrochemical 113 _ gradient 98 Precision 200 Pressure 45 -, critical 5'1 _, partial 59 _, radiation 166 Principle, Archimedes' 46 _, Pascal's 45 Properties of ferrites, principal 144 _ _ light, quantum (cor puscular) 167 _ _ _ , wave 162 _ _ materials, magnetic 142, 143 _ _ saturated water va pour 67 _ _ semiconductors 129 Pulley block 38 -, fixed 37 _, movable 37 o
"
o
Quantum 188 _, energy of 197 _, radiation 166 !Radiation, thermal 168 Radioactivity 190 _, artificial 190 Ratio of photoconductive cell 168 _, Poisson's 41, 43 Reactance, capacitive 148
Scale, centigrade (Celsius) 51 _, Fahrenheit 51 - , Reaumur 51 Screw 38 Second 15 Second law, Newton's 23, 25 Self-inductance 138 Self-induction 137 Semiconductors 115 Sensitivity of the eye, relative brightness 157 _ _ photoconductive cell, s peci fie 168 _ _ photoelectric cell, integral 168 Series, the Balmer 191 - , - Lyman 191 _, - Paschen 191 Shear 41 - , absolute 41
SUBJECT INDEX
- , relative (shearing strain) 41 Shell, electron 189 Skin effect (or surface effect) 149 Sound 79 - pressure 83, 92 Source, current (electric generator) 107 Sources of waves, coherent 162 Spark gap 115, 131 Specific gravity 24 - heat 61, 63, 64 at constant pressure 52 - - - - volume 52 - - , mean (or average) 52, 62 - - , true 52, 62 Spectral emissivity 169 s.pectrum 169 - ,absorption 171 , continuous 170 - , electromagnetic IE3 - , emission 171, 181 - , line 170 - of mechanical vibrations 88, 89 - - radiation 169 -, sound frequency 87 Standard atmosphere 60, 72 Statics of liquids and gases 45 - - solid bodies 35 Stilb 156 Strain, longitudinal 40 - , transverse 41 Stress, allowed 45 - of deformation 40 Superconductivity 109 Superconductors, transition temperature of 118 Surface tension 68, 69 System of bodies, closed 23
21S
-
- elements, periodic 192-193 Systems of units, CGSE CGSM and MKSA 133: 204-205 Temperature of bod v 51 - coefficient of metals 117 - , cri tical 54 - , Curie (Curie point) 140 145 ' Theorem, Torricelli's 47 Theory of elasticity 40 Thermal electromotive force 116, 121, 122, 131 - expansion of solids and liquids 54 The,"mionic emission 114 Thermoelectricity 116 Tbird law, Newton's 23 Threshold of audibility 83 - - feeling 83 • - , photoelectric 167, 182 Torque (or moment of force) 25 Torsional rigidity 78 Trajectory 16 Transfer of heat 55 Types of spectra 169 Ul timate stress (or breaking stress) 41, 42 UI trasonic vibrations 79 Units of acceleration 17 - - measure of physica' quantities 202, 203 - - velocity 16 Vapour, saturated 54 Velocity, average angular IS - , esca pc 20, 22, 72 , instantaneous angular 18 - of electromagnetic waves 153
214
SUBJECT INDEX
molecules, average 59 - , the most probable 59 - , root mean square 58 non-uniform motion, average 16 - - rotational motion, linear 18 - seismic waves 86 - - sound 84, 85, 86 - - uniform motion 16 - - - rotation, angular 17 - - vibration 80 - - waves 80, 90 Viscosity 47, 48-50 Volt 97 Wave 79 - . cylindrical 80
intensity of 83 linearly polarised 166 longitudinal 81 plane 80 sine 80 spherical 80 , transverse 81 Wavelength 80 - of particle 191 Wavelengths of ultraviolet region of spectrum 174 - - visible region of spectrum 174 Weber 134, 137 Weight of body 36 Windlass 37 Work 24 - function 114 - of current-carrying wire in magnetic fielcj., 136